JP6704638B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a spinning drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as “slot machine”).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as slot machines are known in which, for example, when a bonus game or an ART game is started, the game is provided to a player in an advantageous manner for a predetermined period (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ..

In this type of gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which even if a bonus game or an ART game, which is advantageous to the player, is finished, it is started immediately in succession so that the interest is enhanced.

JP, 2002-172206, A

However, if the games that are advantageous to the player are started in succession, the interest may be increased, but this may incite a sense of euphoria. On the other hand, if gambling is suppressed, interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to preferably suppress a decrease in interest.

To achieve the above object, the present invention includes a variable displayable plurality of symbol rows, wherein the stop operation means capable of stopping the symbol column is variably displayed, wherein the stop operation means operated a is the game result appears gaming machine is, the front Stories and advantageous game execution selecting means for performing run lottery operations aspect instruct capable of generating continuously advantageous game stop operation means, the advantageous game Based on that the result of the execution lottery is a specific result, an advantageous game execution means capable of executing the advantageous game, and a probability that the specific result is obtained as a lottery state in which the execution lottery of the advantageous game is performed. A lottery state control means for controlling one of a plurality of lottery states different from each other, and the probability of obtaining the specific result among the plurality of lottery states being the lowest probability state transitioned to another lottery state On the basis of the above , counting means for counting the parameters that can be updated as the game progresses, and, even when the advantageous game is midway, when the parameter reaches a predetermined value during the execution of the advantageous game Advantageous game forced ending means for forcibly ending the advantageous game, under the condition that the execution of the counting of the parameters is started and the advantageous game is forcibly ended even if the advantageous game is in the middle. When a certain parameter reaches the predetermined value, the gaming machine is shifted to a low probability state in which the probability of obtaining the specific result is the lowest.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in interest.

It is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing a state where the door-type front member is omitted. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the slot machine. FIG. 16 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state where the door-shaped front member is omitted. It is a Z1 part enlarged view of FIG. It is a Z1 part enlarged view of FIG. 4 which shows the state which moved the connector holder. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted. 7A is an enlarged view of Z2 portion of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of Z2 portion of FIG. 7 showing a state where the connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of FIG.8(a). It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side. It is an exploded perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from the back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is a front view which abbreviate|omitted the cover body of a wiring relay member. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of a stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of a stopper showing other forms. It is a sectional view of the important section showing the guide structure of a case member. It is a sectional view of the important section showing the guide structure of a case member. It is a partial perspective view of a symbol variation display device showing another form of a handle. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a main part showing a relationship between a case member and an outer body side stopper. It is a sectional view of an important part showing a relation between a wiring window and a reel of a symbol variable display device. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. It is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26. It is a rear view of the heat dissipation port seen from the back side of the slot machine. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up the power supply device from the bottom. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of a main part of a side plate of an outer body and a power supply device, showing another embodiment. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member which decomposes|disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of the door type front member which decomposes|disassembles and shows a transparent plate. FIG. 33A is a sectional view corresponding to the line AA of FIG. 33 of the door-shaped front member having a transparent plate attached. It is a disassembled and assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door-type front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door type front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the backside which shows the upper half part of a door type front member. It is a cross-sectional perspective view which cut|disconnected the coupling tool in the longitudinal direction. It is a principal part cross-sectional top view of the door type front member which shows the example of another hinge metal fitting. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of essential parts showing the door-shaped front member of FIG. 42 in the middle of opening. It is a perspective view showing the state where an image display object and a frame member were opened in a model unit. It is a perspective view showing the state where a door type front member was opened with a connecting tool connected. It is a development view in which a symbol row of the reel band is two-dimensionally developed. It is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the symbol display window in the slot machine viewed from the front. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, etc., which are equipped in the slot machine. It is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of a winning combination. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of one basic game in the slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the processing procedure of starting processing. It is an example of a block diagram showing the transition of the RT state. It is a figure for explaining an example of the rough flow of processing of indication function processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a game flow including a processing procedure concerning generation of an indication function. FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing continued from FIG. 54 when the game number management processing is being performed and the ART game is not being performed. FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example when the number of games management process is not in progress, which is a process subsequent to FIG. 54. It is an example of a lottery table used for additional determination lottery. It is an example of a lottery table used in the additional game number determination lottery in the ART medium low probability state. It is an example of a lottery table used in the additional game number determination lottery in the ART medium-high probability state. It is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for determining the number of games to be added to the specialized zone. It is an example of a lottery table used for the number-of-games determination lottery during the special zone preparation. It is an example of an ART initial win lottery table that is performed during the game number management process and not during the ART game. It is an example of a non-ART lottery state transition lottery table. It is an example of a lottery state transition drawing during ART. It is an example of a specialized zone lottery table. It is an example of a table used in a transfer destination determination lottery performed when a special role is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state, and (a) a table used when the special role is a special cherry role, ) A table used when the special combination is a special watermelon, and (c) a table used when the special combination is a special maintenance replay combination. It is an example of a table used for the ceiling game number determination lottery when the state is changed from the hell state to another ART lottery state. It is an example of a lottery state determination table after the ART game. It is an example of the ART first win lottery table in the pullback state. It is an example of a lottery table for determining a transfer destination when it is decided to lose the lottery state in the lottery state after the ART game and to shift to the non-ART lottery state. It is an example of a production operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won in RT1. It is an example of a production operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won in RT2. It is an example of a production operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won in RT3. It is another example of the production operation lottery table when the internal lottery is won. It is a figure for demonstrating an indication function display. It is a figure for demonstrating an indication function display. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure of reel stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure of reel stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure of judgment processing. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of a bonus game start processing. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of a bonus game end determination processing. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of ART game determination processing. It is a time chart showing an example of the flow of the entire game. It is a figure for demonstrating the data block of RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display by a special display LED. It is a flow chart for explaining processing at the time of an error occurrence. It is a flow chart for explaining processing at the time of an error occurrence. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a processing procedure of power failure recovery processing.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings by taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 4 is a door-shaped front member. 5 is an enlarged sectional view of the slot machine showing the state, FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the Z1 portion of FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the Z1 portion of FIG. 4 showing a state where the connector holder is moved, and FIG. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of the Z2 part of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of the Z2 part of FIG. 7 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. 9 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. 13A and 13B are perspective views of the main part of the case member for explaining the temporarily fixed state of the connector holder, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, and FIG. 15 is a wiring relay member. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder, FIG. 18 is a perspective view of a stopper for fixing the case member, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a guide structure of a case member, FIG. 22 is a partial perspective view of a pattern variation display device showing another form of a handle, and FIG. 23 shows a relationship between a case member and a stopper on the outer body side. FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the main part, FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the main part showing the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the variable display device, FIG. 25 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, and FIG. 27 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine, FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26, FIG. 28 is a rear view of the heat dissipation port seen from the back side of the slot machine, and FIG. 29 is a part of the slot machine showing a power supply device. Sectional front view, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing a state in which the power supply device is looked up from below, FIG. 31 shows another form, and a side plate of the outer body and a main part cross-sectional view of the power supply device, and FIG. 32 is another form. 35 is a schematic sectional view of the illuminating device, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a door-type front member showing a transparent plate and a light emitting unit in an exploded manner, and FIG. 34 is a perspective view of a door-type front member showing a transparent plate in an exploded view. 33A is a sectional view of a door-type front member with a transparent plate, which is taken along the line AA of FIG. 33, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of a hinge fitting, FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, and FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part showing a member, FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part showing a door-shaped front member in the middle of opening, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view seen from the back side showing the upper half of the door-shaped front member. 41 is a vertical cut of the connecting tool 42 is a cross-sectional perspective view of an essential part of a door-type front member showing another example of the hinge fitting, and FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of an essential part showing an opening of the door-type front member of FIG. 42. Reference numeral 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening/closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened with the connecting tool still connected.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment of the present invention has a box-shaped outer main body 100 having an open front surface, and a door-like door that opens laterally with a rotating shaft 100a on the front surface of the outer main body 100. A door-type front member 200 rotatably attached to the front body, a symbol variation display device 300 for varying a plurality of symbols by a driving means, a case member detachable from the outer main body 100 and having an opening 401 on the front surface. 400 and an image display body 500 for displaying an arbitrary image.

[1. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer main body 100 has side plates 102, 102 attached to the left and right sides of a bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed on top of the side plates 102, 102 to provide a vertically long "mouth" in front view. It is formed in a letter-shaped frame shape, and a back plate 104 is fixed to the back of the frame to form a box shape with only the front opening. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined rearward, and therefore the opening of the outer body 100 has a rearward inclination. Further, in the top plate 103, a plurality (in the embodiment, in an embodiment) in an area facing the upper bar 600 (see phantom line in FIG. 25) of the game machine installation island in a state where the game machine installation island (not shown) is installed. 4) through holes 132, 132... Are drilled.

[1-1. Outer body-partition plate]
A partition plate 105 in the shape of a shelf plate is provided in the outer main body 100 substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in a front view having a projecting portion 106 as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, and has vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends thereof. The side plates 102, 102 are fixedly attached to the inner surfaces thereof, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. A cylindrical projection (not shown) is formed on the mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 by burring processing (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the pilot hole with a punch). The cylindrical protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-machined in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 to be positioned. Further, at the innermost portions on both sides of the partition plate 105, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the partition plate 105 and the back plate 104 of the outer body 100.

[1-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, from the medal ejecting device 110 for ejecting a medal, which is a game medium, to the medal tray 201 at the lower front surface of the door-shaped front member 200, and from the medal ejecting device 110. A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for accumulating overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[1-1-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-medal ejection device]
The medal ejecting device 110 is a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means, to which a hopper 110b for accumulating medals is attached. A medal ejection port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device main body 110a. Certain medals are sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the drive means. Further, the hopper 110b is provided with an overflow gutter 110d for discharging an overflowed medal, and the above-mentioned auxiliary medal storage box 111 for medals faces below the projecting end of the overflow gutter 110d. It should be noted that the medal discharging mechanism of the medal discharging device 110 may be any known mechanism, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[1-1-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply device]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion where three members of a bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, a side plate 102 on the left side when facing the front, and a back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. There is. The power supply device 112 is for supplying electricity to electric parts such as the medal emitting device 110 and is a component that easily generates heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 radiates heat to a mounting portion of the power supply device 112. The mouth 104a is opened.

The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is made of transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, so that it is easy to find an unauthorized operation on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) of the power supply device 112. The device case 112a includes an upper surface plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear surface plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer body 100, a front surface plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear surface plate 112c, and the inside of the slot machine 1. It is formed of a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 30) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a facing the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is not covered and is in an open state. However, this open surface is attached to the outer main body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. Will be blocked.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is below the guard portion 102b. It is designed to allow one side to sneak in. As a result, even if the one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the guard portion 102b closes the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard part 102b is formed in a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly projected to the side plate 102 side, and the tip of the guard part 102b is formed. It is designed to fit in the groove.

As described above, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer main body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is closed by the side plate 102 during use, It is easy to incorporate the substrate 112s and the like using the open surface, and it is not necessary to attach the cover to the open surface after the substrate 112s and the like are incorporated into the device case 112a, so that workability is improved.

A large number of vent holes 112g, 112g,... Are formed in the upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a so that heat is not trapped inside. .. The device case 112a is raised like a stilt by legs 112h, 112h provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-temperature relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,... Of the bottom plate 112r. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat dissipation port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air behind the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If an inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 30) is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a to raise the ventilation space 112i, the height of the leg 112h and the heat dissipation port 104a can be increased. Even if there is a difference in height, the ventilation space 112i can communicate with the heat dissipation port 104a.

[1-1-2-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply-fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes a mounting piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that projects from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. It is fixed to the outer main body 100 by a combination of 112 m and a heat dissipation port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100.

That is, the outline of the heat dissipation port 104a is formed smaller than the outline of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat dissipation port 104a. Further, the projection 112m provided on the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is located at a position inscribed in the heat dissipation port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the heat dissipation port 104a in order to resist the lifting operation of the power supply device 112. It is composed of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protrusion 112m-2 which is inscribed in the vertical side of the heat dissipation port 104a so as to resist the overturning operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, by simply pushing the power supply device 112 along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 and inserting the protrusion 112m into the heat dissipation port 104a, the rear surface (back side) of the device case 112a can be moved upward (lifted) and as shown in FIG. At, the fixation to the right (rollover) is completed. Of course, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted by the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted in a direction other than the pulling direction by a simple operation of fitting the protrusion 112m.

On the other hand, a plurality of through holes 112p for screws are formed in the mounting piece 112k protruding from the front plate 112d, and wood screws 112q are passed through at least one of the through holes 112p to fix the side plate 102 of the outer body 100. As a result, the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted also in the pulling direction, so that the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[1-1-1-2-2. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply-power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving electric power from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. In the past, a bulge portion was provided beside the heat radiation port 104a and the power cord was pulled out from the bulge portion. However, at this position, even if the power cords are bundled, there is a high risk that the power cord will be grounded. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing, and the power cord must be put out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for that, so that the slot machine 1 may be moved on a manufacturing line or between lines. There is a risk that the power cord may slip on the ground or move under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1 and get caught there.

On the other hand, in the heat dissipation port 104a of the embodiment, the cord outlet 104b is expanded from the upper side thereof to the upper side, and the power cord is pulled out therefrom. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, the installation is completed simply by setting the power supply device 112 in the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and screwing in the single wood screw 112q. It is possible to significantly reduce the installation work. Further, according to the present invention, the fixing is completed by screwing on one surface, and therefore, particularly when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to visually recognize and can be surely fixed. .. By the way, conventionally, it is necessary to screw onto a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112, and in particular, the screw fixing to the back plate 104 is difficult to visually recognize, and thus it may be forgotten.

Further, since the heat dissipation port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat dissipation port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, an extra step and cost are hardly generated. On the contrary, since the position of the heat radiation port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are made to coincide for fixing, the cooling efficiency is improved. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting projection 112m can be integrally molded, so that there is almost no cost. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a, which are useful as a measure against heat generation of the power supply device 112, can be implemented with almost no cost.

[1-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer body 100, and a wiring relay member 113, which is a core of wiring means described later, is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The back plate 104 is attached (see FIGS. 1 and 2), and a ventilation hole 133 for heat radiation is formed above the wiring relay member 113.

[2. Door type front member]
FIG. 3 shows the front side of the door type front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door type front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 on the lower side of the front side, and an operation section 202 is provided substantially at the center of the front side. The operation unit 202 has a slot 203 for inserting medals, and a single-insertion button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal stored as data in a memory of a main board 409 described later. Similarly, a MAX insertion button 206 for instructing the insertion of the maximum number (for example, 3 pieces) that can be used in one game and a medal return for returning the medals packed in the medal selector 207 described later to the medal tray 201. A button 208, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command of a medal stored as data in the memory of the main board 409 (a discharge command by settlement), and a starting lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300. And, three reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c for stopping each reel 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300 are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is one example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the slot 203, a medal gutter 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207, and a return gutter 213 is connected to the lower side. The medal selector 207 is a known one that switches the flow path by turning on/off a built-in solenoid (not shown). When the player waits for a medal to be inserted by the player, the flow path is on the medal gutter 212 side, In addition, in a state where the insertion of medals is rejected, such as the insertion of medals exceeding the specified number, the flow path is set to the return gutter 213 side. The medal trough 212 is designed such that its tip end faces the hopper 110b of the medal ejecting device 110 when the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed position covering the front surface of the outer main body 100, and the medal selector 207 is inserted from the insertion slot 203. The medals that have flowed through the medal gutter 212 pass through the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return gutter 213 is connected to the front side medal tray 201, and the medals flowing from the insertion opening 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201.

[2-1. Door type front member-transparent window]
The door-shaped front member 200 has a size that covers the entire front surface of the outer main body 100, and an upper half portion thereof is covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. It is 214. The transparent window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the pattern variable display device 300 can be seen vertically side by side, and an image is formed by the forehead frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The areas of the display body 500 and the pattern variable display device 300 are visually divided into upper and lower areas. In this way, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the pattern variation display device 300, the positions of the image display body 500 and the pattern variation display device 300 are switched up and down. However, it can be used as it is.

[2-2. Door type front member-transparent window-transparent plate]
For the transparent plate 214a, a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a methacrylic resin containing rubber having excellent impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical characteristics, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used in the embodiment. ) Is a substantially upside-down trapezoidal shape, and has an edge member 214b that bulges to the front side with the side facing the player as the front, on the periphery of the three sides (the left and right sides and the upper side) excluding the bottom. 214b and 214b are integrally molded during resin molding using a resin molding frame. When the edge member 214b is integrally formed around the periphery of the flat plate-shaped transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. As described above, even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the pattern variable display device 300, bending and distortion are unlikely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b has a shell structure that is open to the rear surface side (not a solid structure but a shell-like structure having an internal space, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, if necessary, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or letters on its surface are incorporated in the internal space.

Although the light emitting unit 217 is illustrated as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200 in FIG. 34, the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to the illustrated shape, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the position where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the peripheral edge of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, but may be provided at least on one side.

33 and 34, reference numeral 218 is a fixing member provided at the left and right corners on the transparent plate 214a, and is a screw passed through the through hole 214c (see the enlarged view of FIG. 33) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), it is stopped in the state of FIG. 34 fitted between the edge members 214b. While the fixing member 218 functions as a corner decoration on the outside, the fixing members 218 are provided with respect to the through holes 200a and 214d (see the enlarged view of FIG. 33) provided at the corners above the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a, respectively. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door type front member 200, and thus plays a role as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door type front member 200.

33 to 35, reference numeral 217a is a light emitting body of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b is a reflecting member that supports the light emitting body 217a. As shown in FIG. 35, the reflection members 217b of the light emitting units 217 located on the left and right sides are set at an angle so as to reflect a large amount of light from the rod-shaped light emitting body 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the configuration in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitting body 217a can be arranged closer to the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it is as if it is a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. , Is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. The reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect a large amount of light of the light emitting body 217a (combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) toward the upper side of the slot machine 1. ing.

The light emitting unit 217 having the above-described configuration can perform an effect of appealing the occurrence of a big hit to the surroundings by turning on during a game, especially when a big hit occurs. In this way, by providing a highly appealing effect to the surroundings, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won the jackpot, and the gaze of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, which further enhances the game. In addition, by appealing to the surroundings that a big hit has come out, it is expected that the model will become more popular and the operating rate will be improved.

The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment is configured as described above, and the plate-shaped bottom side of the door-shaped front member 200 is provided in the concave groove 219 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Insert it diagonally from the front side and fit it in a fitting type, and in that state, make the transparent plate 214a upright and bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door-type front member 200, and further, of the door-type front member 200. It is fixed by a screw 603 (see FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 shows a main part of the door-shaped front member 200 cut at this time. As is clear from FIG. 35, if the player temporarily detects a foreign substance from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if it is forcibly inserted, there is little room for the tip of the foreign object to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[2-3. Door type front member-locking device]
A lock device 215 that is opened and closed by using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the free end of the door-type front member 200.

[3. Pattern change display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, 301c that can be individually rotated by a driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are incorporated and housed. It is a well-known one which has a device case 302 for performing a game with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c.

The device case 302 is a modified hexagonal column shape except that the three sides facing the front (player) from the octagonal column that is laid down sideways are removed, and the bottom plate 304, the top plate portion 305, and the right side in FIG. Of the right side plate 306, the left side plate 307 of the left side, a vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, an upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate portion 305 and the rear plate 308, the bottom plate 304 and the rear plate 308. It has a box shape surrounded by a lower swash plate 310 provided between the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, and a part of the arc of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c protrudes from the front of the device case 302.

Further, the top plate 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 which can be changed between a use state in which a finger can be hooked and a non-use state in which the top plate portion 305 is laid down. It is designed to be carried around.

The configuration in which the variable handle 311 is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 as described above is closely related to measures for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400, and thus the opening 401 of the case member 400 is provided with sufficient strength for cantilevering the image display body 500. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 traverses the opening 401, it obviously obstructs the insertion/removal of the device case 302 into/from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 is made variable and is made to lie down on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can easily pass under the reinforcing bar 402. Therefore, only by providing the variable handle 311 on the top plate portion 305 of the apparatus case 302, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in the opening portion 401 of the case member 400 so as to cross the opening portion 401. Become. By the way, in the conventional device case, since the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle, there is no room for providing a reinforcing bar in the opening of the case member.

Although the handle 311 of the embodiment has a structure in which the handle 311 is changed by swinging between a standing use state and a lying non-use state, the structure that can change the handle 311 between the use state and the non-use state is implemented. It is not limited to the form. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belt loops 314 and 314 are cut and raised on the top plate 305, and the belt loops 314 and 314 are provided with retaining portions 315 and 315 made of synthetic resin or leather at both ends. With the structure in which the band-shaped grip 311 provided is inserted to raise the center from the non-used state shown in FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to a non-use state lying down.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-shaped lower handle 316 is provided in a protruding manner on the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 of the embodiment, and the lower handle 316 is grasped to push the device case 302 or By pulling, the case member 400 can be easily put in and taken out.

[4. Case member]
The case member 400 has a size that substantially matches the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404, 404 erected on the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. The rear plate 405 is provided upright on the rear edge, and the rear plate 405 and a top plate 406 that covers the upper surfaces of the side plates 404, 404 are formed in a box shape having an opening 401 in the front surface.

In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear face plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the side plates 404, 404 and the inner surface of the opening 401 of the top plate 406 are reinforced by metal. Members 407, 407, and 407 are provided, and metal reinforcing bars 402 that cross the opening 401 are provided between the reinforcing members 407 and 407 of the side plates 404 and 404. Then, below this reinforcing bar 402, as an installation area for the symbol variable display device 300, and below the reinforcing bar 402, as an installation area for the image display body 500, the opening 401 is further provided. A region surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is allocated as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409 which is a main control board is mounted on an inner wall surface of a rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408. A control board other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub-board 510 (see FIG. 44)) is also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

As shown in FIG. 1, skylights 443 and 443 are formed on the top plate 406 of the case member 400. The skylight portions 443, 443 are divided into two parts with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406 interposed therebetween, and each of them is an axis line passing through the through holes 132, 132... Of the outer main body 100. It is located in a region including the intersection and is sufficiently wider than the through holes 132, 132... However, the peripheral edge on the front side of the skylight 443 is brought close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, the through hole 132 can be found out by groping on the basis of the peripheral edge of the skylight 443, so that the position of the throughhole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator cannot look into the skylight 443. Here, the skylight 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylights 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, it is possible to reduce the weight and further reduce the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement.

As shown in FIGS. 2, 5, 6, and 12, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 are provided on the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, and the bosses 410 serve as a back plate of the outer body 100. The boss holes 114 pre-processed in 104 are fitted and positioned. The bosses 410, 410 are provided near the wiring window 411 described later as shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, while the boss holes 114, 114 on the outer body 100 side are near the wiring relay member 113. Therefore, the positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

On the other hand, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, as shown in FIG. A taper portion 413 is formed at an end portion of the recessed step portion 412 on the rear surface plate 405 side, the taper portion 413 extending in a rearward direction. The taper portion 413 guides the projecting step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. The fitting with the concave step portion 412 can be smoothly performed. In this way, the case member 400 is guided straight to the inner side of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the recessed step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid or integrally press-formed on the plate 105, while a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 so that the wheel 414 rolls in the groove of the rail member 115. Good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail member 116 having a convex shape is laid or integrally press-molded on the partition plate 105, while flanges 415 and 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the collars 415 and 415 of the wheels 414.

Further, the case member 400 is stopped by the swing lever type stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18, and 23 in a state of being set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. The stopper 117 is axially attached to the front end portion of the partition plate 105 and two attachments 118 and 118 vertically provided on the top plate 103, as shown in FIGS. The operating posture in which a part of the case member 400 is engaged and the non-operating posture in which the case member 400 is not engaged as in the imaginary line in FIG. Regulate movement. If the stopper 117 has a key shape as shown in FIG. 19 and engages with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

Further, the stopper 117 axially attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing the side plate 404 of the case member 400 and the locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the top plate 406 as shown in FIG. With the case member 400 being pushed into a predetermined position, the operating posture and the non-operating posture can be switched from the inside of the case member 400.

In addition, the rear surface plate 405 of the case member 400 is provided with a long hole-shaped wiring window 411 penetrating to the back plate 104 side of the outer body 100. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the pattern variation display device 300 installed in the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 4, 5, and 24, and the lower side of the main substrate 409. And a horizontally long empty space 417 on the upper swash plate 309 (or may be considered as a horizontally long triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main substrate 409) and the back. It functions as an opening that connects the plates 104.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf plate-shaped temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as a “temporary fixing shelf”) at a substantially middle position of the height of the empty space 417. Also, on the outside of the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411, recesses 419 and 419 are formed as wiring passages that pass through to the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400.

If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300, the wiring window 411 will be the reel 301a of the symbol variable display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c, the horizontal plane HL passing through the center of rotation and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height positions of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are set to the lower limit, that is, the lower side is placed within the range. In other words, it is arranged.

[5. Image display]
The image display body 500 is, for example, a panel-shaped unit capable of displaying an image, which is composed of at least a liquid crystal display (a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like), and can open and close the front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening/closing member 90 (see FIG. 44) that closes. Note that the image display body 500 is attached with the hinge metal fitting 420 to the reinforcing member 407 provided on the side plate 404 on the left side of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (see the hatched portion in FIG. 11 for the mounting position), and is rotated by the hinge metal fitting 420. It is supported freely.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44, a sub-board 510 is assembled on the back surface side of the image display body 500. Therefore, it becomes possible to integrally configure the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the sub-board 510, the handling becomes easy, and the wiring connecting them can be omitted, and the wiring work in the case member 400 can be performed. The complexity of the space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the sub-board 510 appears so as to project from the inside of the case member 400, so that workability with respect to the sub-board 510 can be significantly improved.

[5-1. Image display-Hinge bracket]
FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. Since the hinge fitting 420 has a vertically symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge metal fitting 420 includes a fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, a rotating member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see a broken line area 500s in FIG. 36), and the rotating member 420b. It is composed of a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect the member 420a.

The fixing member 420a of the hinge fitting 420 has a lateral fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf board, one end of the long link 420d is a pin P1 on the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e, and a short link is on the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge fitting 420 has a sideways bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf, and one end of the long link 420d is a pin P3 on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. Further, one end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

In this way, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 form a four-bar rotary chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. 37. A so-called bi-lever mechanism is constructed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is used as a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 37(c), this both lever mechanism approximates the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory about the rotation axis 100a of the door-type front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set. That is, the hinge metal fitting 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the pivot position of the door-type front member 200 changes, the pivot outer edge side of the door-type front member 200 and the pivot outside of the image display body 500. The distance from the edge is set to be almost constant.

The long links 420d and the short links 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h set so as to overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long links 420d). The region 420g is swollen into a triangle so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), and pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are coaxially aligned with each other, and a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) is inserted to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c, thereby locking the both lever mechanisms to lock the image display. It is for fixing 500 to the open position.

[5-2. Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the vertical reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400 is locked to the reinforcing member 407 (right side in FIG. 11) opposite to the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420. The piece 421 is pivotally mounted, and when the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 11, the tip end thereof engages with the receiving portion 508 provided on the back side of the image display body 500, and in this state. The image display body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the opposite direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the image display body 500 becomes rotatable around the hinge fitting 420. Normally, in the state before the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image display body 500 is locked at the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while the image is displayed when the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100. The display 500 is unlocked so that it can be rotated.

[5-3. Image Display-Connector]
By the way, since an image display body 500 that can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is viewed or the case member 400 is operated. Must first open the front door member 200 on the front side and then open the image display body 500 on the back side, which may reduce workability and cause trouble. ..

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of this example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to be the same as the rotation direction of the door type front member 200, and the door type front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. 700 is connected, and the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-type front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the coupling tool 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. That is, the image display body 500 is rotated with the door-shaped front member 200, and it is possible to visually recognize not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 by one lateral opening operation.

Here, as described above, in the door-type front member 200 and the image display body 500 of the embodiment, the rotation locus of the image display body 500 is the rotation axis 100a of the door-type front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge metal fitting 420. Although it resembles a rotation locus about the center of rotation, there is still a relative deviation between the movements of the two. Therefore, in the connector 700 of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the fixed sheath member 701 is formed on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500 and slid inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is housed freely, and the tip of the rod 702 is rotatably connected to the rear surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the locking device 215) by a stopper shaft 703. is there. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 is opened and closed together as if the image display body 500 is an accessory of the door-type front member 200 in association with the opening and closing of the door-type front member 200, and both of them are generated at that time. The rod 702 of the connector 700 moves in and out of the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative displacement of the movement.

The maximum protruding length when the rod 702 is most protruded from the rotating outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is as follows when the image display body 500 is at the open position (for example, when 90° is opened). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. Therefore, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and the increase in size of the connecting tool can be suppressed.

Further, the stop shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the locking device 215 so as to be movable up and down, and always urged downward by a spring 703a. Has been done. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved upward against the bias of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached/detached by moving the stopper shaft 703 upward to lift the lower end. That is, the stopper shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed at the tip end portion of the rod 702 and held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

Further, in FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700, and the rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 of the fixed sheath member 701. It is intended to be housed and held inside, and engages with the hooking wall 702b at the end of the groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the rod 702 from blinding. The rod 702 is provided with a tab 706 protruding from the side surface thereof in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction. The stopper 704 is unlocked by pinching the tab 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It is like this. Further, a retaining prevention piece 701 a is hung on the bottom surface of the fixed sheath member 701 on the distal end side and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining pieces 701a come into contact with the hooking wall 702b when the rod 702 is most protruded, and prevent the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

Further, in FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion provided on the rear surface of the image display body 500 on the rotating outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 engages with the reinforcing bar 402 that crosses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided with a slide-type guide section 402a that is inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin excellent in lubricity different from the image display body 500, and is detachably (replaceable) attached to the image display body 500. There is.

By the way, the relative displacement of the movements due to the difference in the rotation loci of the door-type front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above-described expandable rod-type connector 700, but a flexible wire. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting tool is a flexible wire or the like, the door-type front member 200 collides with the image display body 500 that is stopped while the door-type front member 200 is open, which impairs smoothness. There is a risk. On the other hand, for example, the image display body 500 may be provided with a biasing means such as a coil spring so as to always bias in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-type front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 closes by itself while pulling the connector by the action of the biasing force, so that the door-type front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for accompanying the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge metal fitting 420, which is one element for accompanying rotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the both lever mechanism as described above, and a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. It may be a simple one that rotates the image display body 500.

In the structure in which the attaching means of the image display body 500 to the case member 400 has a hinge structure and the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door, the locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above ( When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, in principle, the case member 400 is kept locked while being attached to the outer body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary such as checking the wiring work space 408. It is possible to select handling, and in that case, important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the sub-board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, which is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. .

A gap 10 is provided before and after the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is inserted by a finger passing through the gap 10. You can grab it. In addition, a handle port 422 is formed in a front center portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (reinforcing band 444 between the sky window portions 443 and 443), and a finger passing through the handle port 422 allows the top plate 406 to move. The reinforcing member 407 can be grasped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be appropriately used as the handle port 422 and the gap 10 depending on the handling place and posture. For example, it is more balanced to carry the case member 400 in a bag shape using the handle port 422 at the time of transportation before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer main body 100, while the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100 as shown in FIG. As described above, since the handle port 422 is hidden behind the outer main body 100 and a finger does not enter, the case member 400 is pulled out by hooking the finger on the reinforcing member 407 through the gap 10. A lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 described above projects from the center of the front surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the lower handle 316 is pushed in or pulled to pull the outer body 100. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integral with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with a screw, and therefore the lower handle 316 is provided in front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Equal to

[5-4. Image display-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire area of the opening 401 of the case member 400 above the reinforcing bar 402. Further, on the lower side of the image display body 500, a frame member 501 integrally surrounding a region below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, a front region of the pattern variation display device 300, is framed. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300 are framed by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, and an appropriate pattern or the like is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 includes a light-emitting source such as an LED, a light-emission control board that controls the light-emitting source, and a decorative member arranged in front of the light-emitting source and capable of transmitting light. Section is provided. Here, a combination of the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 will be referred to as a front opening/closing member 90 below.
(See FIG. 44).

[5-4-1. Image Display-Frame Member-Lighting Device]
Illumination devices 502 are provided above and below the back side of the frame member 501, and the illumination device 502 brightly illuminates the symbol of the symbol variable display device 300. Since the frame member 501 is vertically provided below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variable display device 300, the light source can be brought closer to the symbol variable display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 in such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 in the frame member 501 is characterized in that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low light amount as compared with the conventional lighting device.

As shown in FIG. 4, the illumination device 502 exemplified as the embodiment has a strip-shaped substrate elongated in a direction orthogonal to the paper surface of the drawing (the width direction of the slot machine 1 and the same direction as the rotation axis of the reels 301a... ). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in 503, and the lower illuminating device 502 has the LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is covered with, for example, a milky white translucent lid plate 505. The upper illuminating device 502 is arranged with the LED 504 facing downward in a translucent cover 507 having a U-shaped cross section and having a milky white color, for example.

The upper illuminating device 502 is installed so that the illuminating direction is obliquely downward toward the player side, that is, toward the transparent plate 214a side from directly below as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set so that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 4) of the main irradiation area of the LED 504 having a relatively strong directivity is obliquely directed to the transparent plate 214a. It is tilted obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

If a rod-shaped light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is used as the light source of the illumination device 502, the substrate 503 of FIG. 4 is changed to a plate-shaped or a concave reflection member that encloses the light source, and direct light is emitted. It may be set so that the center line of the main irradiation area, which is directed by the sum of the reflected light, obliquely strikes the back surface of the transparent plate 214a side. If the irradiation aim of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a as described above, even if a part of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, there is almost no effect.

According to the experiment, when the illumination direction of the illuminating device 502 is directed to the peripheral surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the curved specific portions of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are strongly reflected and become difficult to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is obliquely directed to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the reel outer peripheral surface is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, 301c It was confirmed that a wide range became bright and easy to see. The reason is that the light emitted from the illuminating device 502 hits the transparent plate 214a fitted in the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused over the whole, or the transparent plate 214a is illuminated brightly so that the reel 301a, It is presumed that a wide area of 301b and 301c looks bright or that they are synergistic.

The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can be applied to the lower illumination device 502, and, of course, can be applied only to the lower illumination device 502 as shown in FIG. Note that in FIG. 32, the upper lighting device 502 of FIG. 4 is arranged on the lower side, and the lower lighting device 502 is arranged on the upper side. And “bottom” can be read as “top”.

By the way, when an LED is adopted as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) it is driven at a low voltage, so that it is driven at a high voltage (for example, about 800 V at startup and about 600 V at operation). The safety is higher than that of the cold cathode tube of (b), the life is longer than that of the cold cathode tube, (c) It is more durable than the cold cathode tube which is a glass tube, and (d) the width of the production is possible because of the multicolor emission. (E) It is lighter than the cold-cathode tube used in combination with the inverter, and thus has a merit that the load of the hinge metal fitting 420 supporting the image display body 500 is small.

[6. Wiring means]
For example, each of the insertion buttons 205 and 206 and the starting lever 210 (hereinafter, simply referred to as “generic” as a generic name thereof) attached to the outer main body 100, such as the medal emitting device 110, the power supply device 112, and the operation unit 202 of the door-shaped front member 200. It may be referred to as “main body side electric component”) and, for example, the main board 409 or the like in the case member 400 (there may be simply referred to as “case member side electric component” as a general term for the case member side electric component). Connected to each other. In the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, since the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening/closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100, replacement of the model unit 50, etc. At this time, a rational wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electric component (case side electric component) and the case member side electric component.

[6-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper portion of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. There is. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric component, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 that is screwed, a cover body 121 that covers the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (two large and small in the embodiment) connector boards (hereinafter referred to as large and small in the embodiment) housed between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120. Sometimes referred to as “connector connection terminal board”) 122 and 123.

Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly mounted to the mounting plate 120 and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 that is paired with a connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is mounted in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121 in a non-fixed movable state, and thus the enlarged view of FIG. It can be moved in the vertical direction, as shown in, and can also be moved in the horizontal direction. The small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that makes a pair with the connector 427 at the tip of the harness 426 that is connected to the case-member-side electric components other than the main board 409. It should be noted that the connector 125 and the connector 124 are board fixing types that are fixed to a printed board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standard ones are used.

Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 projecting in a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. And a wiring duct 129 in the shape of a tunnel that projects to the front of the section.

The main body side wirings 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 pass through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or are bundled in a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. In this state, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line L in FIG. 1, the outer main body 100 is distributed to the side plates 102, 102, and turns almost vertically in the vicinity of the corners of the side plates 102, 102 and the back plate 104. Through the wiring openings 109 provided at the back of the partition plate 105, they are respectively connected to the main body side electric components. Of course, when there is an electric component on the main body side (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in a region above the partition plate 105, regardless of the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105. Connected as is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical idea can be understood.
(A) On the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, between the horizontal plane passing through the center of rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300 and the horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, self The wiring window 411 is formed at a height where the lower side is located.
(B) On the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, the wiring relay member 113 that relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electrical components and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electrical components is installed.
(C) A vertical wiring path is formed along the inner surface of the side plates 102, 102 of the outer body 100 for passing wiring.
(D) The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is guided to the side of the case member 400, and from there, connected to the main body side electric component through the wiring path.

In the gaming machine provided with the components (a) to (d) above, the main body side wiring 119 does not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100. Since it bypasses the wiring route provided along (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)), the reels 301a, 301b, 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. In comparison with the conventional configuration, that is, the conventional configuration in which the main body side wiring 119 passes substantially behind the center of the back plate 104 and passes behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the diameters of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c Can be large. In addition, the larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, the greater the force at the time of rotation.

[6-2. Wiring means-connectors 425, 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 connected to the electric parts are connected to each other.

The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-shaped attachment piece 431 which has a through hole 430 at substantially the center thereof, and which protrudes from both sides of the holder main body 429. The wiring relay member 113 includes a well-known button type panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nilatch”: registered trademark) attached to the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 8A. The attachment piece 431 is applied to the end of the support tube 128, and the button type panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support tube 128 and locked. Therefore, the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as a fixing means, and further fixed to the wiring relay member 113, so that the connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 are not disconnected.

[6-2-1. Wiring relay board-connectors 425, 427-temporary fixing shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113, but before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 425. 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400.

The temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf plate-shaped member facing the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12, and 13, and is shown in FIG. Thus, the substantially horizontal bench part 433 on which the connector holder 428 is mounted, the bench side plates 434 erected at both ends of the bench part 433, and the three inward claw pieces 435, 435 protruding from the bench side plates 434. , 435. A space is provided between the center one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 and the other upper and lower two pieces so that the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted therein. Note that one bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hooking portion 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by putting a finger on the finger hooking portion 436 and applying a force in the X direction shown in FIG. 8B. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and in the bent state, the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook 436 is bent into a key shape. By doing so, the connector holder 428 can be detached as if pressing a button as indicated by arrow Y. You can do it easily.

Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. By fitting it between 435, the connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418. Of course, even if it is called temporary fixing, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength so as not to come off from the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer main body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the work of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, the connectors 425, 427 at the ends of the harnesses 424, 426 collide with the parts in the case member 400 and, of course, the parts. There is no danger of damaging yourself.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8B → FIG. 8A, in the wiring process after fixing the case member 400 to the outer main body 100, one of the bench side plates 434 is bent outward as described above. When the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where the attachment piece 431 of itself is in contact with the support cylinder 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connectors of the wiring relay member 113. Since it fits into 124 and 125 (details of which will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in that state to lock the attachment piece 431 to the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by the chain double-dashed lines in FIGS. 5 and 6, if the guide rail 440 for guiding is provided on the bench portion 433, it is only necessary to push the connector holder 428 inward, and workability is improved. improves.

The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 as a support base and is separated from the case member and does not come into contact with the outer body 100. Even if 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

From the above description, the following technical ideas can be understood.
(A) an outer body having a box-like shape having a front face opened and a back face covered with a back plate, and including a power supply device and other main body side electric parts
(B) A model unit provided with a pattern variation display device for varying a plurality of symbols on a case member that is detachable from the outer body, and other case member side electric parts,
(C) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body so as to relay the main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wirings connected to the case member side electric component,
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case side wiring,
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector,
(F) a temporary fixing member provided on the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder,
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member,
(H) Temporarily fix the connector holder to the temporary fixing member before mounting the model unit on the outer body, and replace the connector holder from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means while mounting the model unit on the outer body. (I) A gaming machine characterized in that the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the mounting of the model unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and the coupling of the connectors are separately performed. In contrast to this, for example, the connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. A method is conceivable in which the connectors are automatically coupled by the operation of pushing the model unit 50 into the outer body 100. However, in this method, when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a large load is applied to the connector coupling portion, which makes the reliability uncertain, and there is a problem in that costly measures are required. is there.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention has a structure in which one door type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100 and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door type front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-type front member is divided into upper and lower two stages and the upper door-type front member is used as a component of the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, which may result in unstable connector coupling. There is a problem that a new crime prevention structure is required for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a structure in which one door type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door type front member 200. After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is combined with the component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even if a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and during playing. Further, since only the model unit 50 is the replacement target when the model is changed, and the door-type front member 200 is not the replacement target, the burden on the game hall for changing the model is lightened.

[6-2-2. Coupling of connectors 425, 427 and connectors 124, 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to the single connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425, 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 at the predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, in the structure in which the independent elements of the two connectors 425, 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered together and integrated, the difficult problem of “accurate positioning” of the connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 becomes difficult. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 on the side of the wiring relay member 113 is not accurate, the connectors 425, 124 and the connectors 427, 125 cannot be collectively coupled. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at a mass-production cost. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector provided with a mechanism for increasing flexibility at the time of joining without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still heavy.

On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113, which is a board supporting member, are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are mounted respectively, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. The relay member 113 is non-fixedly housed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121, and the direction orthogonal to the coupling direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (the "orthogonal" here is not limited to strict 90 degrees). It means that it is about 90 degrees according to the social convention.) In this structure, when the connector 425 and the connector 124 are set as the coupling sights of the connector holder 428, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position between the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation occurs. Since it moves for correction, the connector 427 and the connector 125 can be connected.

From the above description, the following technical ideas can be understood.
(1) "In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with the respective connectors, one connector group is fixed to one connector holder and paired with these. The other connector group forming the connector board is mounted on the connector board, the connector board is divided for each connector, and one of them is fixed to the board supporting member, and the other connector board is connected to the board supporting member in the connector coupling direction. A game machine characterized by being attached so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to each other."
(2) "A box-shaped body having a front surface that is open and a back surface that is covered with a back plate, and an outer body that includes a power supply device and other body-side electric components, and a case member that is removable from the outer body. To relay the pattern variation display device to be changed and other model units provided with other case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more systems of connectors attached to the ends of the case side wirings, a connector holder for collectively supporting the two or more systems of connectors as a connector group, and the connector Fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member, another connector group by means of a board-fixing type connector which is paired with each connector of the connector groups of two or more systems and fixedly used on a printed board, A connector connecting terminal board attached to a wiring relay member attached to a back plate and having a connector of the other connector group fixed thereto; the connector connecting terminal board is divided for each connector; One is fixed to the wiring relay member, and another connector connection terminal board is attached to the wiring relay member so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to the connector coupling direction."
(3) "In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with the respective connectors, one connector group is fixed to a substrate supporting member via a connector substrate. At the same time, another connector group paired with these is attached to one connector holder, and one connector in the connector group is fixed to the connector holder, and the other connector is connected to the connector holder in the connector coupling direction. A game machine characterized by being attached so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to each other."
(4) "A box-shaped body having a front surface opened and a back surface covered with a back plate and provided with a power supply device and other main body side electric parts, and a plurality of patterns on a case member detachable from the outer body. To relay the pattern variation display device to be changed and other model units provided with other case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more systems of connectors attached to the ends of the case side wirings, a connector holder for collectively supporting the two or more systems of connectors as a connector group, and the connector Fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member, another connector group by means of a board-fixing type connector which is paired with each connector of the connector groups of two or more systems and fixedly used on a printed board, A connector connecting terminal board, which is attached to a wiring relay member attached to a back plate, and to which a connector of the other connector group is fixed, and one connector in the connector group is fixed to the connector holder. At the same time, another connector is attached to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to the connector coupling direction."

In the above gaming machine, if the connector holder is operated by aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connectors due to manufacturing errors or the like, Since the non-fixed connector connecting terminal board floats together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error, it is also possible to connect the connectors that are not the connection target. Therefore, it is possible to collectively connect the connectors of a plurality of systems by using one connector holder. Moreover, the connector used is of a general-purpose and inexpensive type such as the DIN standard that is used by soldering it to a printed circuit board, and the cost is also low.

Further, the connector holder is reliably fixed to the wiring relay member by a fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark), and further to the back plate of the outer body via the wiring relay member. On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness, and even if the model unit moves, the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder because the flexible harness absorbs the movement. .. Therefore, even if relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves together with the outer body only and does not interfere with the model unit. No load is applied to the department. Therefore, the reliability of connector coupling is very high.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is allowed to float and the large connectors 425 and the connectors 124 are set as the coupling reference as in the embodiment as compared with the opposite configuration is the configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the small connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that it is easier to automatically correct the deviation. Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are adapted to be coupled to each other before the other connectors 427 and 125, which makes it easier to align the connectors for coupling aiming.

In addition, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 9, a chamfered portion C( If the chamfering is linear or curved, the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered portion C improves the connectivity between the connectors.

In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are allowed to move freely as in the embodiment, it is possible to allow any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the side of the connector holder 428 to move freely. In that case, the same effect as above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428 is provided with a receiving tube 429a provided with a female screw, while ear pieces 427b having play holes 427a are formed on both sides of the connector 427, and the receiving tube 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. A play hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted in the connector, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the play hole 427a and the receiving cylinder 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be integrally fixed to the mounting plate 120. Further, in the embodiment, the two connectors are treated as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 12, it is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variable display device 300 on the back side of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438 and 438 that penetrate the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405) of the case member 400 are formed near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the pattern variation display device 300 and the main substrate 409, and in FIG. 11, the right side surface of the device variation display device 300 toward the device case 302 ( A cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel board 312 provided on the non-hinge side surface of the door-type front member 200 is drawn out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is formed as shown in FIG. The cable 313 is housed in the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from the other wiring port 438 into the case member 400 and connected to the main board 409 or the like. It should be noted that the cable groove 437 is provided with cable stoppers 439 at predetermined intervals so that the cable 313 does not drop out from the cable groove 437.

However, both the main board 409 and the reel board 312 are case member side electric parts inside the case member 400, and originally, it is not necessary to draw the cable 313 out of the case member 400. The reason why the wiring holes 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 are provided in the case member 400 so as to bypass the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

The reel board 312 is installed at a non-hinge side of the door-type front member 200 among the side surfaces of the pattern variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of workability of wiring for inserting and removing the connector in a limited space. Is preferred. On the contrary, if the reel substrate 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-type front member 200, the door-type front member 200 (see FIG. 1) that is fully opened and the reel substrate 312 are located close to each other. Because they face each other, it is impossible to secure a large working space for inserting and removing the connector.

On the other hand, on the other hand, it is assumed that the connecting portion of the substrates (main substrate 409, sub substrate 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel substrate 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. The cable 313 crosses the inside of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or conversely, the cable 313 may be hooked when the device case 302 is pulled out.

On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 so as to bypass the cable 313 to the outside, as in the embodiment, the above-mentioned trouble of the cable 313 does not occur. Further, it is better to perform the wiring work in a state where the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel substrate 312 is also a wiring cost. There is a margin to say. Therefore, the cable 313 is loosened with the device case 302 set at a predetermined position, and the looseness of the cable 313 becomes large depending on the amount of pulling out. When the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 and the inner corner of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. You can escape the loose part of the.

Further, when the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, it is between the inner side of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space. The wiring using the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 does not need to be limited to the cable 313 of the reel substrate 312, and can be applied to all cables that traverse the inside of the case member 400.

Besides, in FIG. 11, reference numeral 441 is a function separation relay terminal plate.

The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in a completed product in which the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the game arcade, but at this time, as shown in the imaginary line in FIG. 25, the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the game machine installation island top rail 600 are made of wood screws or the like. In the case of fixing with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted into the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight portion 443. The fixing member 601 is tightened through the skylight 443 with a tool 602 such as a screwdriver to fixedly connect the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the game machine installation island. Since a plurality of through-holes 132 are provided, they can be arbitrarily selected and used from among them if necessary. For example, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper rail 600 can be selected even if the position or size of the upper rail 600 varies. Further, when the game machine is entirely replaced, by changing the through hole 132 to be used, it is possible to prevent an adverse effect that a hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position of the upper crosspiece 600 (so-called foolish hole).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and the heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like causes a cooling fan (not shown) of the image display body 500. , And reaches the ventilation hole 133 of the back plate 104 from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 through the gap S, and then escapes to the inside of the game machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, and this acts as a barrier to block the gap S in a wide range, so that the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked at this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 is blocked. It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[7. Design of each reel, design row]
On each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, as shown in FIG. 46, a symbol string (a total of 21 symbols shown in the array numbers 0 to 20) constituted by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. The reel band (pattern band) in which the symbol () is written is attached. FIG. 46 shows a state in which the symbol arrays described on the respective reel bands 321a, 321b, 321c attached to the respective reels 301a, 301b, 301c are developed two-dimensionally. In addition, the above-mentioned array number is conveniently shown in order to identify the symbols arranged in the symbol sequence. Further, in FIG. 46, the reel 301a to which the reel band 321a is attached is shown as a left reel, the reel 301b to which the reel band 321b is attached is shown as a middle reel, and the reel 301c to which the reel band 321c is attached is shown as a right reel. In the description of the above, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are also referred to as necessary.

Each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a predetermined number (for example, three) of continuous symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, which is an opening portion 401 (also referred to as a symbol display window, hereinafter, symbol). It is arranged so as to be visible through the display window 401) (see FIG. 47 described below).

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the types of the symbols are “7” symbol painted in red (hereinafter referred to as “red 7 symbol”)”, “7” symbol painted in blue (hereinafter “7” symbol) "Blue 7 design"), "BAR design", "Cherry design with cherry design", "Watermelon design with watermelon design", "Replay design", "Bell design" "Bell pattern", "designated as "right" (hereinafter referred to as "design")", "designated as "positive" (hereinafter referred to as "design")" is there. The bell pattern can be divided into a "bell 1 pattern" in which one star is drawn and a "bell 2 pattern" in which two stars are drawn, depending on the number of stars drawn in the bell. it can.

In FIG. 46, the "red 7 pattern" is two of array number 3 and 6 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 12 in the reel band 321b, and array number 10 in the reel band 321c. One corresponds. The "blue 7 pattern" corresponds to one of array number 16 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 15 in the reel band 321c. The "BAR symbol" corresponds to one of the array number 11 in the reel band 321a, two of the array numbers 6 and 9 in the reel band 321b, and one of the array number 2 in the reel band 321c. The "cherry pattern" is one of the array number 10 in the reel band 321a, three of the array numbers 1, 14, and 17 in the reel band 321b, and the array numbers 7 and 14 in the reel band 321c. The two correspond. There are five "replay symbols", which are array numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, and 17 on the reel band 321a, and array numbers 0, 5, 8, 11, and 11 on the reel band 321b. Sixteen, five, and five of the array numbers 1, 5, 8, 13, and 17 correspond to the reel band 321c. "Bell 1 pattern" has three array numbers 13, 15, and 18 on the reel band 321a, and five array numbers 2, 7, 10, 15, and 18 on the reel band 321b. In the reel band 321c, the three array numbers 9, 12, and 16 correspond. The "bell 2 pattern" corresponds to three array numbers 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a and two array numbers 0 and 4 in the reel band 321c. "Watermelon design" has three array numbers 9, 14, and 19 in the reel band 321a, two array numbers 4 and 13 in the reel band 321b, and an array number 3 in the reel band 321c.・The four numbers of 6, 11, and 20 correspond. The "significant symbol" corresponds to one of the array number 20 in the reel band 321a, one of the array number 19 in the reel band 321b, and one of the array number 18 in the reel band 321c. The "regular pattern" corresponds to one of array number 0 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 18 in the reel band 321c. Note that the types of symbols are merely examples, and are not limited to these types.

[8. Frame member]
FIG. 47 shows an enlarged view centering around the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401 in the slot machine 1 viewed from the front. According to FIG. 47, a symbol display window 401 is formed in the center of the frame member 501, and a plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs are provided around the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to “various indicators described later”). Are shown to be located. Then, a part of the three reels (reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is made visible through the symbol display window 401. Further, it is shown that the effect display surface of the image display body 500 is arranged above the frame member 501, and the image and the like (including moving images) displayed on the image display body 500 are visible to the player. Is becoming In the following, each of the above components shown in FIG. 47 will be described in detail.

[8-1. Design display window]
As shown in FIG. 47, from the symbol display window 401, among the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, three consecutive symbols can be visually recognized. From the top of the three positions where this symbol is displayed, "upper row (or upper row position)" (for example, the position where the "bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301a is displayed), "middle row (or middle row position)" (for example, , The position where the "replay symbol" of the reel 301b is displayed), and the "lower stage (or the lower position)" (for example, the position where the "bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301c is displayed).

From the above, in the symbol display window 401, it is possible to display "number of columns x number of reels" symbols. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of 9 symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 from "the number of stages (3) x the number of reels (3)".

Various lamps are provided on the left end of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, which will be hereinafter unified as a display panel 501) (on the left side as viewed from the symbol display window 401), among which “BET1” and “BET2” ", BET3" is the BET lamp (bet lamp) 614. The numbers of the BET lamp (the above-mentioned "BET1", "BET2", "BET3" numbers 1, 2 and 3) are Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets and the number of medals bet), that is, "1" is 1 bet (the number of medals bet is 1), and "2" is This means that 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2) and “3” correspond to 3 bets (the number of medals bet, also called MAX bet 3).

The effective sequence is determined according to the number of bets. This "effective sequence" is also called an effective line. In the following, they are collectively referred to as the effective line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is judged to be displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one activated line. That is, even if each of the symbols constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, if each symbol is not lined up on any of the activated lines (that is, the predetermined symbol). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not lined up on the activated line), it is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. In this way, when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not lined up on the activated line, it is determined that the disjointed symbol combination mode (that is, the lost symbol combination) is displayed.

Next, the bet number and the effective line will be specifically described. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an example, as a general rule, a game involving three cards is specified or recommended (the specified number is three). However, in the bonus state, a game is played by multiplying two cards (a specified number of two cards). In addition, the effective lines in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment are two lines, that is, a straight-lined line that rises to the right (a line that rises to the right) and a straight line that descends to the right (a line that descends to the right). Specifically, in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47, a line (that is, a line rising to the right) 623b in which "BAR symbol-replay symbol-sense symbol" is displayed, and "Bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" Only the two lines of the line in which "" is displayed (that is, the line descending to the right) 623a are valid lines.

The bet number and the effective line are not limited to the above example. For example, the effective line may be a line that can be visually recognized by the player in the symbol display window 401, and may be, for example, one or a plurality of straight lines, a mountain line, a V line, or the like. Further, the number of effective lines is not limited to two, and one or a plurality of effective lines may be set. Further, the number of effective lines may be changed according to the bet number of medals in the game.

The combination of symbols on the activated line displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 is "Bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" displayed on the lower right line 623a which is one of the activated lines. Since this combination of symbols is a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination (replay combination), the next game is automatically bet without inserting medals, and the same game as the previous game is executed again. It becomes possible to do. Even if "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" is displayed on the activated line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance which combination of symbols of the symbols is displayed. However, the combination of the symbols "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol" is displayed on the middle line which is not the active line, so that the player can recognize that the replay has been won. In addition, like the above-mentioned replay combination (replay combination), it is difficult to grasp the winning combination on the activated line at a glance, but it is difficult to grasp the winning combination when viewed from the entire symbol display window 401. As for the other winning combinations, symbol combinations may be prepared in the same manner. At this time, even if it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance only by the effective line, when looking at the entire symbol display window 401, the winning of the winning combination (the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the effective line. It is possible for the player to easily understand what has been done.

[8-2. Various indicators]
As shown in FIG. 47, on the display panel 501, around the symbol display window 401, in accordance with the progress of the game of the slot machine 1 (for example, based on the result of the internal lottery or the ART first win lottery) (or A plurality of indicators such as flashing lamps and LEDs are arranged. Of the plurality of such display devices, various display devices other than the special display LED 612 will be described.

The error lamp 604 starts lighting (or blinking) when some trouble, failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “error”) occur during the game of the slot machine 1, and that an error is currently occurring. It is a lamp that has the role of notifying players, etc. (including the staff of the hall). In FIG. 47, the letters “ERR” are drawn in the vicinity of the error lamp 604 for the error. Since it is difficult to indicate the details of the error only by lighting or blinking by the error lamp 604, the slot machine 1 can display the information indicating the details of the error that has occurred on the special display LED 612 provided separately. .

The replay lamp 606 is a lamp having a role of notifying the player that a replay (a game can be played again without betting a new medal) can be performed when the game result is a replay (described later). In FIG. 47, the character “REP” is abbreviated for replay in the vicinity of the replay lamp 606.

The start lamp 608 is a lamp that has a role of starting lighting (or blinking) when the bet number reaches the MAX bet and urging the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation). In FIG. 47, the word “STR” is abbreviated as “STR” near the start lamp 608.

The medal IN lamp 610 is a lamp that has a role of prompting the player to bet by keeping lighting (or blinking) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the medal IN lamp 610, an insert (input of game value) is abbreviated and a character “INS” is drawn.

When the player inserts medals or pays out medals according to the game result, the medals (game value) that can be used by the player are stored, and the stored number display LED 613 displays the stored number. The display has a role of notifying the player of the number of stored medals, and is composed of two laterally arranged 7-segment LEDs (the left side shows the stored number display LED 613a and the right side shows the stored number display LED 613b). For example, if the upper limit of the number of medals that can be used by the player is 50 and the upper limit is stored, “5” is displayed on the stored number display LED 613a and the stored number display LED 613b is displayed. By displaying "0", the number of stored medals of "50" is displayed so that the player can identify it.

The BET lamps 614 (614a to 614c) indicate the number of BETs when a BET operation for betting a medal (game value) is performed with a specified number as an upper limit before the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game. It is a display device having a role of notifying the bet amount (BET number) of the game value in one game by displaying, and is composed of three lamps corresponding to the BET number. Specifically, when the BET number is 1, the BET lamp 614c is turned on, when the BET number is 2, the BET lamp 614c is turned on in addition to the BET lamp 614c, and the BET number is the upper limit of 3 (MAXBET). Then, the BET lamp 614a is further turned on, so that all the BET lamps 614a to 614c are turned on.

It is assumed that the display of these indicators described above is controlled by the main board 409 (see FIG. 48 described later).

In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game, which will be described later, and a 7-segment LED for displaying the accumulated payout number of medals in the bonus game and counting the bonus game are separately provided. Good.

Further, the display device such as the stored number display LED 613 and the special display LED 612 (described later) is not limited to the 7-segment LED as long as the information to be displayed on the display device can be displayed. For example, the number of segments may be different from "7" (14 or 16 segments), and LCD (liquid crystal display), VFD (fluorescent display tube), organic EL, or the like is used instead of the LED. May be.

[8-3. Special display LED]
The special display LED 612 has a function of displaying the number of payouts of the medal (game value) when the medal (the game value) is paid out according to the game result, thereby indicating the number of payouts of the game value to the player. It is a display device and is composed of two laterally arranged 7-segment LEDs (a special display LED 612a on the left side and a special display LED 612b on the right side). Specifically, a two-digit number can be displayed using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, and when 15 medals are paid out in accordance with the game result, the medals are paid out one by one. By changing the display contents such as “01”, “02”,..., “15” in total, the player can be notified in real time of the payout status of the gaming value (medal).

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 has a role of an instruction function display for displaying the instruction content by the “instruction function” in the game, in addition to the role of the payout number display. Although the details of the “instruction function” will be described later, in summary, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the generation of an instruction by the “instruction function” is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special display LED 612 is displayed. Information indicating the pressing position of the reels 301a to 301c and the stop order (which can be read as the pressing order and the pressing position of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the stop operation) is displayed as an instruction function display, and depending on the content of the display. When the stop operation of the reel 301 is performed, a game result advantageous to the player is provided.

In the instruction function, the performance that affects the generation of the instruction (specifically, lottery related to the instruction function and state transition management, etc.) is controlled by the main board 409, and specifically, the lottery related to the instruction function. The main board 409 manages not only the control of the state transition and the state transition but also the indication function display on the special display LED 612. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the determination result by the main board 409, the display of the instruction function of the same content is also displayed on the display means other than the display destination of the instruction function display (for example, the image display 500). Although it is possible to display, the display may be controlled by a peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) other than the main board 409. The connection relationship between the special display LED 612, the main board 409, and the sub-board 510 is illustrated in FIG.

Explaining in a specific example, when the push order small combination (in this example, one of the “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6”) is selected as the winning combination during the ART game, the main board 409 (particularly, Under the control of the CPU 1110), the instruction content of “appropriate pressing order” corresponding to the selected winning order small combination is displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, when the player understands the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612, the player can recognize the proper pressing order. On the other hand, the same information as the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510 by a command or the like, so that the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 that has received the command indicates “appropriate”. It is possible to display an image indicating “pushing order” on the image display body 500. A specific display example of the indication function display will be described later in [10-3-6].

In the slot machine 1, it is possible to perform such an instruction function display in a mode in which any display on the display panel 501 also has a function (in this example, the special display LED 612 for displaying the payout number is displayed. Be done). That is, on the special display LED 612, the indication function display and the payout number display are performed, but by displaying each display period separately, for example, both can be displayed without confusion. Note that, in the present embodiment, the function of displaying the number of payouts is also used, but a display having other functions may also be used, or a display dedicated to displaying the instruction function may be provided.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected as an abnormal state, the error lamp 604 lights up to notify the occurrence of the error, while the special display LED 612 can identify the type of the error. It also has the function of displaying error information. The display timing of the instruction function display, the payout number display, and the error information display will be described later in [10-3-7] and the like.

[9. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 48 schematically shows the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, etc., which are installed in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for totally controlling the progress of the game, and a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input/output interface 1116, etc. are mounted on the main board 409. The main board 409 has a function of affecting the result of the game (acquisition of the game value). Specifically, for example, an internal lottery execution means for performing an internal lottery, a bonus game based on the result of the internal lottery. A bonus game execution means for executing the RT state, an RT state control means for controlling the RT state, an ART first win lottery means for performing an ART first win lottery, and a plurality of lottery states having different winning probabilities of the ART first win lottery. ART lottery state control means, instruction function control means for executing control relating to whether or not to permit the instruction function, game number management control means for executing game number management processing for managing the number of games executed by the player, Further, it has a payout control means for paying out medals as a prize based on a winning combination. Details of each of these means will be described later.

Further, in the slot machine 1, as an example of a configuration not shown in FIG. 48, a door opening detection switch that detects an open state of the door-shaped front member 200, a storage release switch 209 (stored medal clearing switch), and a medal selector 207. A medal selector inner lever detection sensor provided therein, a stop button LED (stop button LED_1, stop button LED_2, stop button LED_3) that can be lighted around each of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are provided. These components are controlled by the main board 409.

The above-described one-sheet insertion buttons 205 and 206, the start lever 210, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c, the storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons use sensors (not shown). Thus, the operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 300 (starting rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a. , 211b, 211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are output to the main board 409.

Note that, hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as needed. The respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c corresponding to this are called a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

Further, the slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main board 409, and various signals are input to the main board 409 from these devices. The devices include the symbol variation display device 300, the medal discharging device 110, and the like.

The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor is composed of a stepping motor, and each reel 301a, 301b, 301c can be independently rotated and stopped, and at the time of rotation, plural kinds of symbols are continuously displayed from top to bottom in the symbol display window 401. Is displayed while changing to.

Further, each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c has a position sensor 331a, 331b, 331c for detecting a reference position for rotation, and each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c has a position sensor 331a, 331b, 331c, respectively. Are provided correspondingly (left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, it is possible to obtain stop position information of each reel on the main board 409.

The solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b described above are installed in the medal selector 207. The insertion sensor 207b detects a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is OFF, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted. The medals that have flowed through the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is also invalidated at the same time, so that neither betting by medals insertion nor accumulation of medals is performed.

The medal releasing device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the paid-out medals one by one in the ejection opening 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Has been done. Further, the auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a full-medal sensor 111a, and when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the medals have exceeded the predetermined number is output to the main board. Output to 409. At this time, the image display 500, the special display LED 612, the error lamp 604, etc. perform an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal accumulation, and inform the player, the hall employee, or the like that the abnormality has occurred (FIG. 85, which will be described later). Equivalent to "Auxiliary storage full tank error" shown in).

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variable display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c described above is output from the main board 409. Further, a drive signal is input to the medal releasing device 110 from the main board 409 according to the type of a combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and in response to this, the medal releasing device 110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal discharge device 110 or there is no medal at all, the detection of the number of coins by the payout sensor 110e will be delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, the payout sensor 110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 409. In response to this, the main board 409 reports that an abnormality has occurred in medal payout. The content to be notified is displayed on the error lamp 604, the special display LED 612, the image display body 500 and the like to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the player, the hall employee or the like (see “Payout medal empty error” shown in FIG. Equivalent). The main board 409 and various indicators (error lamp 604, start lamp 608, special display LED 612, stored number display LED 613, etc.) are connected by, for example, a harness, and the main board 409 is connected to each of these indicators through corresponding ports. The lighting and display in can be operated.

The slot machine 1 includes a sub-board 510 as a peripheral board different from the main board 409. The sub-board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input/output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (audio system). An amplifier) 1126, a sound source IC 1128, etc. are mounted. The sub-board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409, and controls the display of the image display body 500, light emission (or lighting, blinking, turning off, etc.) of the illumination device 502, and the operation of the speaker 512.

Further, when the external relay terminal board 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game hall through the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. The connection configuration in FIG. 48 is merely an example in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also a peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) other than the main board 409 may be connectable to the external relay terminal board 131. Various signals can be transmitted from the various substrates connected to the relay terminal board 131 to the external relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. Specifically, various information on games managed by the sub-board 510 and emergency information that can be managed by the sub-board 510 (for example, error information notifying malfunctions or defects of components of the slot machine 1) are held in a hole. It becomes possible to output to the computer 1200.

In addition, the power supply device 112 is provided with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power supply switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1 and can be operated only by opening the door-type front member 200. Of these, the power switch 112v is for turning on and off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing the settings (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. .. Further, the reset switch 112u is for releasing an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is also operated together with the setting key switch 112t when changing the setting. Note that these switches described above may be installed on the main board 409.

The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In the game by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the number of bets on medals has been determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and thereafter the player stops the reels 211a, 211b, 211c. When the reels are operated, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stop-controlled, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the activated line, and necessary. Accordingly, a specified number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded.

As described above, the reel bands 321a, 321b, 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, respectively (see FIG. 46). Then, from the display contents (the combination mode of the symbols displayed on the activated line) displayed in the symbol display window 401 when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line (upward right line 623b and downward right line 623a) in the symbol display window 401.

In addition, in this example, the description is given with two active lines, but when the slot machine 1 has a plurality of active lines, a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of active lines. It is determined whether or not there is. As a result, when it is determined that the symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, the medals are paid out in a quantity obtained by adding up the number of payouts corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations. In the slot machine 1, a predetermined number of coins (for example, 15 coins) can be specified as the upper limit of the number of medals paid out per one time. In such a case, if the total number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on multiple activated lines exceeds the upper limit, a predetermined number of medals of the upper limit are paid out and the upper limit is exceeded. Minutes are truncated. Also, the excess of the upper limit value is not divided into subsequent games and paid out.

In the following, when the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the activated lines, the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is referred to as the winning symbol) The combination is complete, or the winning symbols are said to be complete.

The slot machine 1 design includes "red 7 design", "blue 7 design", "BAR design", "cherry design", "replay design", "bell 1 design", "bell 2 design", and "watermelon design". "," Significant design" and "regular design" are as described above, but of these, "red 7 design", "blue 7 design" and "BAR design" stand out compared to other designs. Easy and easy to identify. The term “easy to identify” as used herein means the degree to which the player can easily identify the symbols, including the state in which the reel is rotating and the state in which the reel is stopped. Due to the color and the size of the symbols, these symbols are easy to stop and aim at such that these symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player stops the symbols even while the reels are rotating. (That is, it is easy to press). Further, as to the “significant pattern” and the “regular pattern”, as can be seen from FIG. 46, “justice” can be read in the form of a circle formed by two patterns of the “significant pattern” and the “regular pattern”. As described above, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are arranged adjacent to each other in the vertical direction, and only one reel 301a, 301b, and 301c is arranged.

These symbols are only symbolic symbols by themselves (only one symbol does not correspond to the winning combination), but by becoming a predetermined combination, it becomes a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination. .. That is, a predetermined game privilege is awarded. Below, the combination mode of the symbols permitted corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

[9-1. Combination of winning combination and design]
Here, a winning combination (including a winning combination) in the internal lottery executed by the internal lottery executing means and a combination of symbols corresponding thereto will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations. The lottery table (also referred to as a winning value determination table) shown in FIG. 49 is stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance. As will be described later in detail, in the slot machine 1, the internal lottery execution means included in the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 executes the internal lottery.

[9-1-1. Outline of ART function]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described below is assumed to have an ART function using a push order small win, as an example of the function of the gaming machine. The push order bells 1 to 6 can display the bell symbol alignment only when the order in which the reel stop button 211 is operated is proper. In the gaming machine provided with the ART function, the winning of the ART first win is determined by the ART first win lottery executed by the ART first win lottery means included in the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

The ART first win lottery in the slot machine 1 of this example is a lottery that determines whether or not the preset number of ceiling games is to be shortened. 32 games) are set. The ceiling game number is the number of games until the ART game is definitely executed, and when the number of executed games reaches the ceiling game number, the ART game is started. However, if the player wins the ART first win lottery again before the number of executed games reaches the ceiling game number, the ceiling game number is shortened and reset.

In the present embodiment, when the ART first win lottery is won, the number of preset ceiling games is shortened to, for example, 32 games, and the state until the ART game is started is set as a precursor game state described later (precursor). In the game state, it is not allowed to continuously generate the instruction of the operation mode of the stop button 211 (that is, the ART game cannot be started)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an ART first win lottery is won, an instruction for operating the stop button 211 is immediately generated continuously (immediately starting an ART game), or an instruction for operating the stop button 211 is issued. It may be a state in which it is allowed to be generated continuously (for example, a state in which an ART game is started when a specific symbol combination is displayed).

The number of executed games is counted when the number-of-games management process described later is started. When the number of ceiling games is set by winning the ART first hit lottery, a precursor effect execution lottery is performed, and when the precursor effect execution lottery is won, the precursor effect is executed. By executing this precursor effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation for the ART game. Details of the game number management process including setting of the ceiling game number will be described later.

In the ART game, mainly by the case where the push order bells 1 to 6 are selected as the winning combination in the internal lottery of the winning combination, the teaching is given by teaching or notifying the proper pressing order expected to pay out the most medals. It enables the player who has performed the reel stop operation according to the above to obtain many medals. On the other hand, during the game period other than the ART game (non-ART), by not teaching or notifying the above pushing order, it is possible to make the medal acquisition in the proper pushing order uncertain, and This can make a difference in the expected number of medals and the pace of medal consumption. Such an ART function is an example of an instruction function provided in the slot machine 1, and its detailed processing will be described later.

Further, supplementing the pushing order, since the three reels 301a to 301c are used in the slot machine 1, the pushing order (stop order of the reel 301) is "left-middle-right" and "left-". There are 6 types of "right-middle", "middle-left-right", "middle-right-left", "right-left-middle", and "right-middle-left". In the following description, the respective pressing orders will be referred to as “forward pressing”, “sandwich pressing”, “middle forward pressing”, “middle reverse pressing”, “reverse sandwiching pressing”, and “reverse pressing”. The “press sequence 123” described in the remark 1 column of FIG. 49 corresponds to the “left-middle-right” press sequence (normal press), and the “press sequence 132” is the “left-right-middle” sequence. It corresponds to the pressing order (pinching pressing), the "pressing order 312" corresponds to the pressing order of "right-left-middle" (reverse pinching pressing), and the "pressing order 213" is the pressing of "middle-left-right". It corresponds to the order (middle-order push), the "push order 321" corresponds to the "right-middle-left" push order (reverse push), and the "push-order 231" is the "middle-right-left" push order. Corresponds to (reverse press).

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a procedure of the stop operation for stopping the reel 301, when the game in which the pushing order is not taught, such as the period in which the ART game is not executed (non-ART), the left reel 301a Is first recommended (that is, the reel stop button 211a is first stopped), "left push ("forward push" or "sandwich push")" is recommended, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are recommended. When a stop operation that does not follow the recommended procedure is performed by first stopping the game, it may be possible to take a disadvantageous measure for the player, such as temporarily stopping the ART lottery.

Such a stop result in the slot machine 1 is, for example, in the case of a winning combination in which the winning combination corresponds to the pressing order small combination (in this example, the pressing order bell), the reel stop button 211 (individually, the reel stop button 211a, Depending on the pressing order of (211b, 211c), the mode of the stop result is different. Such a difference in the appearance of the stop result can be realized as follows, for example. That is, as a winning combination corresponding to the “pushing order bell”, a plurality of types of winning combinations each having an appropriate pressing order associated therewith (specifically, “pushing order bell 1” to “pushing order bell” shown in FIG. 49). 6”, and if the winning combination is, for example, “push order bell 1”, forward push (left/middle/right corresponds to “appropriate push order”) is prepared and selected by internal lottery. The combination of different winning combinations allows the operation of a plurality of types of condition devices. Then, at this time, according to the priority order in which the drawing pull-in control of the symbols when stopping the reels 301 is different according to the order of pressing the reel stop button 211 (for example, "number of sheets priority control" or "symbol combination number priority control"). By setting it to be executed, it is possible to make the mode of the stop payout different based on the pressing order, and as a result, it is possible to make the difference in the payout number.

Here, "number priority control" means that the number of payouts at the time of winning (when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the activated line) is the highest when the operation of a plurality of condition devices is permitted. It means the pull-in control that gives priority to the condition device that increases and draws the symbol of the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device from the "retractable symbol" onto the effective line and stops it. The "symbol combination number priority control" means that when the operation of a plurality of condition devices is permitted, the condition device that gives the largest number of symbol combinations that can be displayed by the "drawable symbol" is given priority. However, it refers to the pull-in control in which the symbol corresponding to the condition device is pulled in on the effective line and stopped.

Then, for example, "push order bell 1" that makes the normal push "appropriate push order" is selected as the winning combination, and the push operation of the reel stop button 211 is "appropriate push order (left/middle/right order). It is determined that the pull-in control by the above-mentioned "number-of-sheets priority control" is performed in the case of ", and the pull-in control by the above-mentioned "symbol combination number priority control" is performed in the case of "inappropriate pressing order". At this time, in the case of "appropriate pressing order", the condition device of the eight winning combination with the largest number of payouts at the time of winning is prioritized, and the symbol combination of the eight winning combination is drawn on the activated line. On the other hand, in the case of “inappropriate pressing order”, the condition device for the one-card combination or the condition device for the zero-card combination is prioritized, and the symbol combination of the one-card combination or the zero-card combination is drawn onto the activated line. Thus, if "push order bell 1" is selected as the winning combination, if the reel 301 is stopped in the "appropriate press order", eight reels will be awarded, while "unsuitable push order" When the reel 301 is stopped at “”, a winning combination (one winning combination, 0 winning combination) having a smaller payout number than the eight winning combination can be won.

Note that the symbols that can be drawn onto the activated line when the reel 301 is stopped are limited based on the position of the reel 301 at the time of performing the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 (specifically, for example, a maximum of 4 frames). Up to is allowed), depending on the timing of this stop operation (pushing timing), there are a drawable design and a non-drawable design. As a result, the appearance of the stop result varies depending on the push timing, and the priority of the condition device according to the push timing is also preset.

As described above, in the slot machine 1, when the winning combination associated with the “appropriate pressing order” is won, the operation of the plurality of condition devices is allowed and different priority control regarding the drawing pull-in control of the reel 301 is performed. By setting, when the game based on the “appropriate pressing order” is played, the privilege that is advantageous to the player (for example, comparison It is possible to stop at a stop result that can give more medals).

Further, although not illustrated in FIG. 49, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment may use, for example, a push order replay as another push order small win.

The above is the outline of the ART function in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the following description, the ART game using the push-order bell as described above is an example of the special game advantageous to the player, but the special game advantageous to the player in the slot machine 1 is limited to the ART game. It is not a thing, but includes other advantageous game states (for example, bonus game, AT game, RT game, etc.). In addition, the ART function is not limited to the ART function using the pressing order, and in addition to this, for example, a pressing position (a role in which the privilege granted based on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 can be changed) It may be used.

[9-1-2. Type of winning role]
The lottery table shown in FIG. 49 will be described. In the slot machine 1, different lottery tables are prepared depending on the RT state. In FIG. 49, as an example of the RT state in the slot machine 1, a general state (RT0), RT1, RT2, RT3, a bonus internal state, And bonus states are shown. In addition, in this specification, the general state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state will be described as being included in the RT state. Here, the general state is a state in which neither the bonus game nor the RT is in progress, the bonus flag is not established, and the state is controlled after the bonus game is finished. The bonus internal state is a state in which the bonus (specifically, BB1 and BB2 described later) is won by the internal lottery, and the winning state of the bonus is carried over without shifting to the bonus state. The bonus state is an advantageous game state in which a bonus (specifically, BB1 and BB2 described later) is won by an internal lottery, and a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is displayed to shift to the bonus. Note that although BB1 and BB2 are shown as bonuses in FIG. 49, other types of bonuses can be installed in the slot machine 1, and an RB bonus, a single bonus (SB), etc. may be provided. May be. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare a state corresponding to each bonus, but a detailed description of each state is omitted because it is the same as that of a general gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the winning probability (or the number of registered characters) for each winning combination is set for each RT state, and the lottery prepared in advance corresponding to each RT state. An internal lottery will be held using the table. Then, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device according to the winning combination is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the operated condition device is displayed on the activated line, which will be described later. Reel stop processing is performed. Then, when any winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the activated line, the payout of medals based on the winning combination is performed. In the payout of medals based on the winning combination, the payout number of medals may be set to be different depending on the RT state and the number of medals (regulated number) of the game. At this time, it is preferable to separately prepare a lottery table according to the specified number.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, one condition device and one reel control pattern are in a one-to-one correspondence. Multiple conditions may be met for the winning combination. By doing so, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stop results (symbol combinations displayed on the activated line) for one winning combination.

The winning combinations shown in FIG. 49 can be roughly classified into bonus combinations (BB1, BB2), small combinations (watermelon combination, cherry combination, bell combination) and replay combinations (replay combination), and any of the above-mentioned combinations. If you don't win the role, you call it “out”. Note that, although “defeat” is not a winning combination in the strict sense, it may be included in the winning combination for the sake of convenience in the following description.

Here, each of the combinations will be briefly described. The “bonus combination” is a combination that triggers the execution of the bonus game, and specifically, “BB1” and “BB2” correspond to the bonus combination. The "replay combination (replay combination)" is performed by a BET process (a state in which the start lever 210 can be operated and a process) described later without inserting a medal, and the next game can be executed (replay). It is a role. The “small winning combination” is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out, and the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the small winning combination displayed on the activated line. As described above, the winning combinations “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” shown in FIG. 49 may be collectively referred to as “push order bell”. In FIG. 49, the number of push-out bells to be paid out is described in plural ways because the number of pay-outs may differ depending on the stop order and the stop position of the reel 301. On the other hand, the “common bell” is a bell in which the bell pattern can always be stopped regardless of the pushing order. Details of each winning combination will be described later.

For specific roles such as watermelon role, cherry role, and replay role, in addition to normal roles (normal watermelon role, normal cherry role, normal maintenance replay role (illustrated as normal maintenance lip in FIG. 49), special roles (Special watermelon role, special cherry role, and special maintenance replay role (illustrated as special maintenance lip in FIG. 49) are included in the winning combinations. Details of these special roles will be described later. In the book, a concept including both a normal watermelon role and a special watermelon role is simply referred to as a watermelon role or watermelon, and a concept including both a normal cherry role and a special cherry role is simply referred to as a cherry role or cherry. A concept including both a normal maintenance replay role and a special maintenance replay role is simply called a maintenance replay role, a maintenance replay, or a maintenance lip.

Further, “out” means that no winning combination is selected as a result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination. In the case of “out”, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped, except when the established state of the bonus combination is carried over (that is, the bonus internal state).

The push order-independent bell pays out 9 coins regardless of the push order, whereas the push-order bell pays out one medal or is not paid out when the push order bell is in an improper push order. .. Therefore, by allocating the numbers in this way, when the player is controlled to the bonus state (bonus game), the number of medals held by the player can be increased without being substantially reduced.

In addition, the result of the internal lottery is not "out of order", and even if you win any combination (bonus combination, replay combination, small combination), the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination executes the pull-in control described later. Stop operation (operation to press the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) at an appropriate timing (push position) aiming to be stopped in the symbol display window 524 (more strictly, the effective lines 623a and 623b) within a possible range. If not done, it is not possible to display the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination on the activated line. Therefore, as a result of the lottery, if a combination of symbols corresponding to this winning combination is not displayed on the activated line, even if one of the winning combinations is won, as in the case where "out" is selected, In step S6 of FIG. 50, it is determined that the game result is a loss. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for the bonus combination and the rare small combination (watermelon combination, cherry combination), if the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing (push position), the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line. However, for other general small wins (push order bell, common bell) and replay wins, the corresponding symbol combination should be displayed on the activated line even if it is stopped at any time. The design is arranged so that it can be done (however, it is also necessary to stop the operation in the proper pressing order for the combination that requires the pressing order). In addition, if the game result is lost even if you win any winning combination, instead of randomly displaying the symbol combination of “out”, you have zeroed the winnings based on the winning combination. The predetermined symbol combination (stop result) shown is controlled to be displayed in the symbol display area. And the symbol combination (stop result) displayed at the time of such a loss is called "zero (or zero)" in the following.

Further, in the description of this embodiment, the expression “bell zero (bell zero eye)” is used for “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6”. Bell zero is a set of bells (to be exact, 8 pieces of bells) due to a stop operation being performed in an improper pushing order when a pushing order bell for which a proper pushing order is determined for each winning combination is elected. It means that the symbol combination of the bell combination which can be paid out is not stopped, and another symbol combination in which the bell combination is eliminated is displayed. In the case of such a bell zero, the bell zero is displayed as a stop result, and payout (including no payout) smaller than the original bell alignment is performed.

Further, in the description of the present embodiment, the expression “split (split)” may be used in addition to the above “zero (split)”. "Bare" is not a "straight line" that is relatively easy for a player to recognize the feature of a stop line, but a stop line that looks like a combination of patterns (so-called). It means that it is a "dazzle". That is, the "separation" is one of the categories related to the display mode of the symbol combination, and even if it is a separation, it is not always lost, so that the medal may be paid out.

[9-1-3. Winning form of winning role]
In the winning combination illustrated in FIG. 49, in addition to a winning combination in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity (single combination), a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected (simultaneous combination). Winning role) is also included. When a single winning combination is won, subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the condition device based on the winning combination. However, when the simultaneous winning combination is won, subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the simultaneous operation of the condition devices based on the winning combinations included in the simultaneous winning combination. In the reel stop control when the simultaneous winning combination is won, a predetermined priority order (for example, "re-play>small role>bonus" or "re-play>bonus>small role") Accordingly, the reel stop processing is performed while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is permitted, and the bonus according to the winning combination is paid out. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the combination of small wins, the method of setting the activated line, etc., control may be performed so that simultaneous winning combinations are won, and when simultaneous winnings occur, respectively. Benefits will be paid out according to the winning role of. In any case, the small role is a "non-carried-over part" that can be won only in the winning game, and the winning status of the winning role that could not be won in the winning game is not carried over to the next game. Even if the simultaneous winning of the winning combination is selected, a medal corresponding to the winning combination is not paid out to the winning combination that cannot win the winning game.

Further, in the case where the bonus combination and the small combination are simultaneously won, the combination selected in such a combination is also referred to as a duplicate combination. Even when a bonus role and a small winning combination are simultaneously won, the condition devices corresponding to the respective winning combinations are activated at the same time as in the case of simultaneous winning between the small winning combinations, and the predetermined priority order (for example, According to the winning combination, the reel stop processing is performed while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is allowed according to the priority order such as "game>small combination>bonus" or "re-play>bonus>small combination". Benefits are paid out. However, for the bonus combination, even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game as described above, the winning combination of the bonus combination is carried over until the symbol combination of the bonus combination is displayed in the subsequent games. It can be used as a "carryover". Specifically, the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is a "carry-over combination". A replay role and a small role (for example, a Bell role) are "non-carried-over roles". In this way, even when the "carryover combination" and the "non-carrying-out combination" are simultaneously elected by the winning of the overlapping combination, which symbol combination is allowed to be displayed is controlled by the reel stop process. Then, if the symbol combination corresponding to the "carry-over combination" is not displayed in the winning game, the winning state of the "carry-over combination" is carried over to the next game or later. However, in such a "next game", when you win another small win, both the "carry-over win" and "another small win" are won, but in this case, Since they are selected in different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to duplicate hands.

In the case of simultaneous winning, which combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is preferentially displayed on the activated line is determined based on the setting of the priority order in the reel stop process.

The winning combinations roughly classified above will be described below in detail.

[9-1-4. Bonus part]
The winning combinations “BB1” and “BB2” shown in FIG. 49 are bonus winning combinations. When the bonus combination is selected as the winning combination, the corresponding condition device “BB1” is activated, the reel stop process is performed, and the privilege is awarded based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, the symbol combination (“red 7” set) corresponding to the condition device “BB1” is displayed on the activated line, so that the bonus game (BB game) is executed. This bonus game is a game in which the player has an opportunity to concentrate and acquire medals over a plurality of games. In the present embodiment, for example, the prescribed number of games is set to two, and the bonus state is shown in FIG. The bonus game is advanced using the drawn lottery table. Then, the bonus game ends when the number of bonus games exceeds a prescribed upper limit number (for example, 30 games) or when the total number of payouts in the bonus game exceeds a prescribed number (for example, 200 games). When the bonus game ends, the bonus state shifts to the general state. Even if the symbol combination of "BB1" or "BB2" is displayed on the activated line, the medal as the prize is not paid out.

Here, the symbol combinations corresponding to "BB1" and "BB2" are arranged so that they cannot be always drawn onto the activated line depending on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 (see FIG. 46). However, "BB1" and "BB2" are carry-over roles that can carry over the winning flag, and even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game (it is not aligned), the winning establishment state after the next game is The game is played as a bonus internal state until it is carried over and the symbol combination is stopped.

Then, when the replay combination or the small combination is won as a result of the internal lottery while the bonus internal state is controlled, the winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority order.

[9-1-5. Replay role]
The winning combination “replay” shown in FIG. 49 is a winning combination of replay (re-playing combination). At the time of winning the replay combination, the condition device for replay operates, and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is allowed on the effective line (either line 623a or 623b), and based on this, reel stop described later The process (step S5 in FIG. 50) is performed. In the slot machine 1, at the time of winning the replay, it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is always displayed on the activated line, and it is determined that the symbol combinations of the replay are complete. In the next game, a bet is automatically bet without inserting a medal again or a bet operation (an operation for inserting a stored medal), and a replay game in which the same game as the previous game is executed again becomes possible. Even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the activated line, the medal as the prize is not paid out.

The replay role includes a sustain replay role (displayed as “maintenance lip” in FIG. 49), a raised replay role (displayed as “upgrade lip” in FIG. 49), a lower replay role (displayed as “lowered lip” in FIG. 49), There are 7 sets of replay roles (displayed as “7 sets of lip” in FIG. 49) and 7 sets of fake replay roles (displayed as “7 sets of fake lip” in FIG. 49). The maintenance replay combination is a replay combination in which the RT state is not changed and the current RT state is maintained. The raising replay combination includes a raising replay combination 1 that can be selected only at RT1 and a raising replay combination 2 that can be selected only at RT2. The raising replay combination 1 functions as a transition combination from RT1 to RT2, The raising replay combination 2 functions as a transition combination from RT2 to RT3. The lower replay combination is a combination that can be selected only at RT3, and functions as a transition combination from RT3 to RT2. The 7-collection replay combination is a replay combination that can be selected only in RT3, and when the 7-combination replay combination is selected in RT3, it functions as a combination to which the ART game is added. Like the 7-set replay role, the 7-set fake replay role is a replay role that is selected only in RT3 and cannot be added to the ART game even if it is selected in the internal lottery.

It should be noted that the maintenance replay role can be independently selected in the internal lottery for both the normal maintenance replay role and the special maintenance replay role, while the upside replay role 1, the upside replay role 2, the downside replay role, and the 7 sets replay role and None of the 7 complete Fake Replay roles will be selected alone in the internal lottery, and will always be duplicated at the same time as the regular Replay role.

When "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintenance Lip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the Raise Replay Combination 1 and the Normal Maintenance Replay Combination, is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "Right-Middle-Left". When it is stopped by pressing (reverse push), the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, and the other pushing order (forward push, pinch push, reverse pinch push, middle forward push, middle reverse push) ) When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the activated line.

When "Raise Lip 2 + Normal Maintain Lip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the Raise Replay Combination 2 and the Normal Maintenance Replay Combination, is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "Right-Left-Middle". When it is stopped with (reverse pinch push), the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line, and the other push order (forward push, pinch push, middle forward push, reverse push, middle reverse push) ) When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the activated line.

When the "Lower Lip + Normal Maintain Rep", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the Lower Replay and the Normal Maintain Replay, is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "Middle-Left-Right" ( When it is stopped by pressing the middle button, the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed on the activated line, and in other pressing orders (forward pressing, pinching, reverse pinching, reverse pressing, middle reverse pressing) When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the activated line.

When "7 sets of reps + normal maintenance reps", which is a simultaneous winning combination of 7 sets of replays and normal maintenance replays, is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed with "right-middle-left". When the operation is stopped in order (reverse push) and at an appropriate timing (timing at which 7 symbols can be pulled in), the symbol combination corresponding to the 7-play replay combination (7 doublet pattern) is displayed on the activated line, and other than that. It corresponds to the maintenance replay role if it is stopped in the pressing order of (forward push, pinch push, reverse pinch push, middle forward push, middle reverse push), or if it is a reverse push but not stopped at an incorrect timing The symbol combination is displayed on the activated line.

When the "7 set fake lip + normal maintenance lip" which is a simultaneous winning combination of the 7 set fake replay role and the normal maintenance replay role is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is "right-middle-left". When the stop operation is performed in the push order (reverse push), the symbol combination (7th zero) corresponding to the 7 set fake replay combination is displayed on the activated line, and the other push orders (forward push, pinch push, reverse pinch) When it is stopped by pressing, middle forward pressing, middle backward pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the activated line.

A feature of the game privilege of the replay game is that it is not necessary to consume a new medal (to add a new medal) in the next game instead of paying out the medal. In addition, since replay is a winning role without paying out medals, for example, by increasing the winning probability, even if the winning frequency becomes high, there is little disadvantage for the hole. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the normal state (general state), the probability of winning is about once every 6 to 7 times. As a result, the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) can be kept within a certain range. In other words, the winning combination of replay can have a role of suppressing excessive medal consumption in the game progress.

Further, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are evenly arranged on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination, and the same replay combination). By setting other symbols (symbols that do not form a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the replay combination) from one to a maximum of four, which are arranged between the symbols that form the combination mode of the corresponding symbols, It is possible to arrange the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination without needing to push the eyes. In such a case, if the priority of the winning combination displayed is “replay (replay combination)>small combination>bonus”, the condition device for the replay combination and other combinations (small combination and bonus combination) Even if the condition device is activated at the same time, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is always stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the other combination is not stopped and displayed.

[9-1-6. Bell role]
Next, the bell role as a winning combination will be described. The bell role is a winning role that can be expected to pay out medals when winning. In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described push order bell 1 to push order bell 6 as the bell combination, there is a common bell in which the push order does not matter. When the common bell is selected in the internal lottery, the combination of bell symbols is displayed on the activated line even if the reel stop button 211 is operated in any order.

[9-1-6-1. Push order does not matter bell]
First, a description will be given of a push-order-independent bell (common bell) in which the winning degree (winning rate and the number of paid-out medals based on winning) at the time of winning does not change depending on the pushing order of the reel 301.

When the "pushing order unquestioned bell" shown in FIG. 49 is selected as the winning combination, any corresponding symbol combination is always stopped on the activated line regardless of the pushing order and the pushing timing of the reels. Condition device is activated. Therefore, when such a condition device operates, regardless of the stop order and the stop timing of the reel stop button 211 by the player, the symbol combination of the bell combination is stopped and displayed to win the bell combination, and the winning combination. The payout of coins (8 coins) corresponding to the above is given as a privilege.

[9-1-6-2. Push order bell]
Next, the push order bell in which the winning degree (winning rate and the number of medals paid out based on the winning) at the time of winning can be changed depending on the pushing order of the reel 301 will be described.

The winning combinations “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” shown in FIG. 49 are the winning combinations of the push order bell that are prepared mainly for surely giving the player a privilege in the ART game. .. As described above, each of the “push-order bell 1” to the “push-order bell 6” is associated with one of the six proper push orders (see FIG. 49).

In addition, in FIG. 49, the winning probabilities of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” are equal, and when they are summed up, the winning probability of “push order bell” is 20478/65536, but The winning probabilities of the "order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" may be arbitrarily distributed under the condition that the above sum value is satisfied. By doing so, the winning probabilities can be evenly distributed (the winning probabilities of the six-choice bell can be equalized) with respect to the six proper pushing orders in the “push-order bell”, and a specific pushing It is possible to make it difficult to select the proper pressing order. In such a case, in the normal game in which it is recommended to stop the left reel 301a for the first time, it is possible to suppress the proportion of the push-order bell winning, and to reduce the payout rate in the normal game. It is also possible to increase the payout rate in the special game.

According to FIG. 49, “push order bell 1” is the winning combination of the push order bell combination that makes the proper push order the push order, and “push order bell 2” is the push order that makes the sandwich push the proper push order. It is a winning role of the bell role, "Pushing order bell 3" is the winning order of the pushing order bell role that makes the proper pressing order for sandwiching, and "Pushing order bell 4" is the middle pushing order is the proper pressing order. It is a winning combination of the push order small winning combination, "Push order bell 5" is a winning combination of the pushing order bell combination that makes the reverse pressing a proper pressing order, and "Push order bell 6" is a proper pressing order of the middle reverse pressing. It is a winning role of the push order bell role to be the push order. Therefore, the “push order bell” in this embodiment is a so-called “six-choice bell” in which the proper push order is divided into six ways. Note that, of course, the setting of such an appropriate pressing order can be freely set within a predetermined limit at the designing stage of the gaming machine.

In this way, the push-order bells “push-order bell 1” to “push-order bell 6” only pay out eight medals as winning the bell role only when the stop operation is performed in an appropriate push order. If the stop operation is performed in an improper push order, "Bell Zero" will be displayed on the activated line, and there will be less benefits (1 or 0 medals are paid out).

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the non-ART state that is not the ART state, it is recommended to press the left side (forward or pinch). Therefore, when the game is performed in the recommended procedure in the non-ART state, the push order bell (specifically, the push order bell 1 to the push order) that makes the proper push order other than left push (forward push or pinch push) Even if the player wins the bell 6), the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination cannot be displayed on the activated line. However, in the ART state, the proper pushing order is taught, and the stop operation according to the teaching contents is allowed, so that the bell combination can be easily won when the pushing order bell is won. If the player performs a stop operation that is different from the recommended procedure and improperly wins medals during non-ART, take measures such as temporarily stopping the ART lottery to pay out overall medals. The expected value of may be adjusted appropriately.

Further, in the slot machine 1, it is not necessary to recommend a specific pressing order as described above. For example, except when instructed by an instruction function such as ART, when the specific pressing order is not the recommended procedure, the player may perform the stop operation in an arbitrary pressing order, and in such a case, Since there is no recommended procedure, it is unnecessary to make adjustments (measures such as temporary stop of ART lottery) in the case of “unreasonably obtaining a medal by performing a stop operation different from the recommended procedure” as described above. Become. When a specific pushing order is not the recommended procedure, it is preferable that the winning probabilities of the pushing orders in the small pushing order win be the same. By making the winning probabilities for each push order the same, the expected value of the payout can be equalized no matter which push order the game is played, so that the player can enjoy the game with the desired push order with peace of mind. it can.

[9-1-7. Rare role]
There are watermelon and cherry roles as rare winning roles. The watermelon combination is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (5 coins) when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. The winning combination is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (two) when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line.

[9-1-8. Special role]
As described above, the watermelon role, the cherry role, and the maintenance replay role include the special watermelon role, the special cherry role, and the special maintenance replay role, in addition to the normal watermelon role, the normal cherry role, and the normal maintenance replay role, respectively. There is. When the special watermelon role, special cherry role, or special maintenance replay role is selected in the internal lottery when the ART lottery state is the hell state described later, non-ART medium low probability state, non-ART medium high probability state, and direct ART It is decided to be one of. That is, in the hell state, the special watermelon combination, the special cherry combination, and the special maintenance replay combination function as a transition trigger (a termination trigger in the hell) to another ART lottery state. The determination probabilities of the transition destinations when these special roles are selected by the internal lottery in the hell state will be described later. In addition, even if a special watermelon role, a special cherry role, or a special maintenance replay role is selected in the internal lottery when the ART lottery state is the non-ART during the lottery state or the ART during the lottery state, the normal watermelon role, the normal cherry role The same process as when the winning combination or the normal maintenance replay winning combination is selected is performed. Also, when a special watermelon role, a special cherry role, or a special maintenance replay role is selected in the internal lottery in the no-drawing state described later, the normal watermelon role, the normal cherry role, or the normal maintenance replay role is selected. The same processing as the case is performed. That is, the special role is a role that exhibits a different function from the normal role only when in the hell state.

The above is the combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and the symbols corresponding to each winning combination.

It should be noted that these symbols are not limited to the symbols and the combination mode of the symbols described above. Further, in addition to the above symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. Then, the types of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily limited to the provision of all winning combinations, and a winning combination of a necessary type may be appropriately selected.

For example, a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination (or a replay combination) may be set, and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is on the activated line only when the reel 301 is stopped in an appropriate pushing order. A push order replay combination that is displayed may be provided.

Further, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination (bell winning combination in the present embodiment) is displayed on the activated line is determined based on the order in which the reel stop button 211 is stopped and operated. Instead of, the push position small winning combination determined based on the timing when the reel stop button 211 is stopped may be prepared. Although a detailed description is omitted, the push position subcombination means that the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed at an appropriate stop timing (push position) and at an improper stop timing. , A small winning combination showing different winning modes. When such a pushing position winning combination is installed, by teaching or notifying the player so that the proper pushing position can be easily recognized in the ART game, when the pushing position winning combination is won. It is possible for the player to easily win the corresponding role, and it is possible to obtain many medals.

The player of the slot machine 1 is selected by an internal lottery based on the lottery probability of the winning combination (FIG. 49), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, the number of payouts, the arrangement of the symbols (FIG. 46) and the like. In some cases, it is possible to find a game method in which the maximum payout can be expected in a situation where the winning combination cannot be known. Hereinafter, such a game method is tentatively referred to as "maximum efficiency hitting method". When playing a game with the maximum efficiency batting method, depending on the reel stop position, it is difficult to draw the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination onto the activated line (watermelon role, cherry role , Chance chance, etc.), the reel stop button 211 is pressed and stopped at a specific timing such that the expected payout amount is maximized in consideration of the winning probability and the number of payouts. By performing a pressing operation on the remaining reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing according to the symbol aspect, it is possible to pull in symbol combinations corresponding to a plurality of types of winning combinations and obtain a large amount of payouts. In other words, the maximum-efficiency hitting method can be said to be a game method in which the loss of the winning combination is suppressed as much as possible.

[10. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds according to the processing procedure on the control program executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 etc.).

FIG. 50 shows a basic processing procedure of one game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting for preparing for a game start is executed. Especially when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned various devices are checked for connection and operation status, and the presence/absence of backup data is confirmed. To execute. If backup data does not exist, a predetermined process such as setting a predetermined initial value is executed.

In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203 or, if there are already stored medals, by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or the one-piece insertion button 205). Then, the operation of the starting lever 210 is awaited. That is, the bet amount for one game is determined, and the BET process is performed until the start lever 210 can be operated. In addition, when the slot machine 1 is a dedicated machine for playing three cards in which a game can be executed by inserting three medals, the one-button insertion button 205 may not be provided.

In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 that is in the operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process for determining whether or not any winning combination should be the result of the internal lottery. Run. This internal lottery process is one of the stages before all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start to rotate in step S4 are in a stopped state (become stopped by the player's stop operation). It is executed to determine whether or not the winning combination of is the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any winning combination, when the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the activated line. It is allowed to stop.

Next, in step S31, instruction function processing is performed as processing relating to the ART instruction function (so-called ART navigation). In the instruction function processing, not only is the winning of the ART game and the start thereof determined, but also during the ART game, the ART navigation that teaches the player the pushing order and the like is executed. Details of the instruction function processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the instruction function processing of this example, the main board 409 manages all the central control related to the ART function (ART initial lottery, determination of ART game number, execution of ART game, transition of RT state, display of instruction function, etc.). To do. On the other hand, it is assumed that the sub-board 510 manages the auxiliary control regarding the ART function (navigation display on the image display body 500, etc.). Even in such a case, the sub-board 510 displays the navigation on the image display body 500 or the like. The display content of the display is limited to that according to the determination result of the instruction function by the main board 409 (content that is not different from the instruction function display). In the slot machine 1, the instruction content of the instruction function (which may be read as the display content of the instruction function display) is determined by the main board 409 based on the winning combination in the game. Further, the display contents of the instruction function display displayed on the special display LED 612 under the control of the main substrate 409 and the navigation display contents displayed on the image display body 500 under the control of the sub-substrate 510 are a pair. The correspondence relation is not limited to 1 and may be a correspondence relation of 1 to n (a plurality of patterns). That is, when any special function LED 612 is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the main board 409, the sub-board 510 executes the navigation display in the display mode corresponding to the special function LED display on the image display body 500 or the like. The specific display mode of the navigation display does not have to be limited to one type, and the navigation display may be performed in any one of a plurality of display modes corresponding to the instruction function display. Good. In such a case, the sub-board 510 or the main board 409 may specify which display mode the navigation display is performed. Further, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, the main board 409 may perform all the processes related to the instruction function process.

Further, in the instruction function process of step S31 shown in this example, it is assumed that the content of the instruction function of the ART is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process in step S3. Here, since the internal lottery process is performed each time the game is executed, the ART initial win lottery performed based on the result of the internal lottery process is also performed each time the game is executed. Further, it is preferable that the instruction function processing be ended before the reel rotation processing of step S4 described in the next stage is started.

Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting the rotation of all reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation processing, the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is validated when the rotation of all reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are validated. The operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying the fact is turned on, and the timer count is started until the next reel rotation process is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c.

In step S5, a reel stop process in which the player's pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted, the operation valid lamp is turned off in the order of acceptance, and the rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c is stopped. To execute.

In the next step S6, at the time when it is determined that all the lines 301a to 301c are in the stopped state in step S5, there is a winning symbol on the "effective line" (whether a symbol corresponding to any winning symbol is present). Based on (whether the combination mode is displayed), a determination process for determining a winning combination is executed. Specifically, by collating the “display content (symbol combination mode) displayed on the activated line” with the “symbol combination allowed to be stopped on the activated line corresponding to the winning combination” Determine the winning combination. Further, the determination process in step S6 may be performed based only on the "display content displayed on the activated line (combination mode of symbols)". In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a line (downward right line 623a) in which the "bell symbol-replay symbol-bell symbol" shown in FIG. 47 is displayed, and "BAR symbol-replay symbol-sense symbol". Two lines in which is displayed (upward-right line 623b) are set as "effective lines". However, the number of effective lines is not limited to this.

In step S7, a medal payout process is executed based on the contents of the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6. Further, when the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination involving a change in the RT state as in the case of the type 2 BB, the RT state is changed (the RT state is changed as shown in FIG. 49) or the replay is performed. Various game benefits are given by the above.

The above is the processing procedure of one basic game of the slot machine 1. Here, in steps S2 (BET processing) to step S4 (reel rotation processing), internal processing is performed triggered by a series of external operations (starting operations) performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S31, step S4) are collectively called a start process. The following is a specific description of this starting process.

[10-1. Startup process]
FIG. 51 concretely shows each process performed in the starting process.

In the start-up process, first, in step S101, the insertion of medals or the operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. When the MAX bet operation or the medal insertion is performed, the determination at step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S102. It should be noted that this determination is made by inserting medals corresponding to the MAX bet (that is, inserting three or more medals in the case of the game of the specified number of three, and inserting two or more medals in the game of the specified number of two). It is assumed that the condition is satisfied only when the 1-insertion button 205 and the MAX-insertion button 206 for MAX bet are operated.

In the next step S102, as a reception process, the bet number (MAX bet only in this example) is determined, and the activated line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when three medals are thrown in when the specified number of coins is three, two lines of a rightward rising line 623b and a rightward descending line 623a become valid lines, which are valid lines. Turn on the lamp.

In step S103, the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is valid, and in that case, whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted. When the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the starting lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the subsequent Step S105.

If the player does not perform the bet operation or the medal insertion or the MAX bet is not reached in step S101, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S104. At this time, the determination in step S104 is also not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

Further, in the replay game, it is not necessary to newly bet a medal. This automatically sets the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. As a result, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

In step S105, the operation of the starting lever 210 is invalidated in response to the operation of the starting lever 210 in step S104.

Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are started to rotate, and random numbers are extracted based on the operation of the start lever 210. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. Regarding the timing of extracting the random number at this time, it may be performed immediately after the operation of the starting lever 210 or may be performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) during the programming process. Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

In step S107, a winning determination (matching of the random number value) of which winning combination corresponds from the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as the extracted random number value) is performed. In this hit determination, the extracted random number value is collated with a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number value performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value matches (matches or matches) the predetermined random number value of the winning combination. At this time, when it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned on. The winning probability for each winning combination in the hit determination performed by collating the extracted random number value with the hit determination table is as shown in FIG. 49.

Then, in the flag processing, when determining the hit value determination table that serves as a determination reference when matching the extracted random number values in the game, the game state flag such as a BB game flag described below is referred to when determining the hit value determination table. The winning value determination table (lottery table) in the game is determined. That is, the hit value determination table corresponding to the game state flag (RT state flag) in the ON state in the game is set and the extracted random number values are collated. As the game state flags, flags corresponding to the RT states are prepared, and for example, there are a general state flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus flag. When both the bonus internal flag and the bonus internal flag are OFF, the general state flag is always turned ON.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, there is a “miss” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and any condition device is not activated. Here, when any of the condition devices is ON (when activated/established), it is possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition device. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the condition devices are satisfied, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination cannot be aligned on the activated line. The above steps S106 and S107 are performed by random number lottery inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps will be collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. It should be noted that the process from the extraction of the random number to the flag process corresponds to the internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 50 described above).

As described above with reference to FIG. 50, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function processing shown in step S31 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 51, this instruction function process may be executed as part of the flag process of step S107 of FIG. 51, or step S108 after the flag process of step S107 is completed. The wait timer time-up may be executed before the time is up.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at a predetermined timing when the flag process or the instruction function process is executed, a group of condition devices that are allowed to operate based on the winning combination, the instruction content of the instruction function to be generated, etc. At least a part of the information determined on the main board 409 side is notified from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) by command communication (corresponding to “instruction information command” described later). The command for notifying these pieces of information may be a command that is appropriately summarized.

Further, the command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) as a result of the instruction function processing performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can adopt the following command modes. .. That is, the winning combinations are divided into groups based on the type thereof, the pressing order of the reel stop button 211, and the like, and for the winning combination selected by the internal lottery, the group including the winning combination can be identified in a main form. Commands can be sent from the board 409 to the peripheral board (eg, the sub-board 510). The classification criteria for grouping the winning combinations are not limited to the above example, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, when presence/absence of push order is added to the classification criteria, all bell roles (push order bell 1 to push order bell 6) included in the push order bell are grouped into a common bell role as a push order unquestioned bell. By making different groups, it is possible to divide the bell role into groups depending on the presence or absence of the pushing order. At this time, the role of bell is divided into a group of push order bells and a group of push order unquestioned bells. Further, the same applies to the replay combination, and for example, it may be divided into a push order replay group and a normal replay group (push order does not matter). Further, all winning combinations may be grouped only by the presence/absence of the pushing order, and in such a case, all winning combinations can be divided into a group with a pushing order or a group without a pushing order. Instead of grouping the winning combinations, the condition devices based on the winning combinations may be grouped. Below, the command for notifying such a grouped winning combination will be described in more detail.

First, regarding the command transmission that notifies the grouped winning combination, when the instruction function display is executed, a command that can understand all the breakdowns of the grouped winning combination (so-called “complete navigation” command) May be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize information such as what type of winning combination the winning combination has been selected and what the pressing order is, and thus a reel stopping method advantageous for the player. It is possible to display a navigation display (so-called “complete navigation”) that can reliably teach the.

Further, when the instruction function display is executed for the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, a command that can understand a part of the breakdown of the grouped winning combination (for example, only the first stop can be taught. "Partial navigation") may be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize a part of the information regarding the selected winning combination, so that the navigation display that can partially teach the reel stop method advantageous to the player (for example, only the first stop) Can be taught, so-called "partial navigation") can be displayed.

Regarding the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combinations, if the instruction function display is not executed, a command that does not give a detailed description of the grouped winning combinations may be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize that the selected winning combination is a winning combination included in the group and whether or not the instruction function display can be executed, based on the group indicated by the command. , I cannot recognize any more information. For example, although it is known that the winning combination is one of the push order bells, the proper pressing order and a concrete breakdown of the winning combinations (any one of the “push order bell 1” to the “push order bell 6”) Can be recognized to the extent that they do not know. It should be noted that a command for notifying the winning combination grouped when such an instruction function display is not executed may be considered as a “condition device command”.

Further, when the instruction function display is executed, it is not necessary to limit the small wins to be grouped to the push order bell, and the other wins (for example, the push order replay) may be grouped together. . In other words, in this case, regardless of whether the push order bell is selected as the winning combination or another combination, the commands indicating the same group are transmitted if the proper pressing order is the same. Means Also, even when the instruction function display is not executed, it is not necessary to limit the small wins to be grouped to the push order bell, and it is possible to group other wins, but in such a case Is the instruction of the winning combination in a state where the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) that has received the command cannot determine the type of the winning combination (whether it is another combination or bell) and is not related to the indication function display. Cannot be performed (for example, when the instruction function is not executed, it is impossible to display the navigation indicating that the other winning combination has been won on the image display body 500). It is desirable to send commands by grouping them according to the type of push order small winning combination, such as separate (replay).

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can reduce the capacity consumed in the main board 409 by transmitting the command for notifying the winning combinations grouped in this way, and the peripheral board can independently win the winning combinations and It is possible to prevent the determination of the pressing order.

In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start processing (specifically, the game one time before the game) has timed up (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). A timer called this wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from when the reel starts rotating in the game until when the reel starts rotating in the next game. It is a thing. If the wait timer has timed out (4.1 seconds have already passed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the subsequent Step S109. Also, this determination loops until the wait timer times out.

In step S109, rotation of all reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started. When the speed of rotation of all reels 301a, 301b, 301c becomes constant, the operation valid lamps of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player will know that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c has become effective.

In the slot machine 1, the reels that have started to rotate continue to rotate at the above-mentioned constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) by the player is accepted. ..

Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset and the wait timer is started until the next starting process, and the starting process is ended.

[10-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collation of the extracted random number values) is allowed as the winning combination (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding winning combination) corresponding to the game. If the corresponding winning combination is allowed here, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is operated, and the information of the operated condition device is used as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery to perform the subsequent processing (reel stop processing, (Determination process, payout process, etc.).

In the slot machine 1, a range of random number values (this is referred to as an extraction range) when performing random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 65535 (that is, 2 16 =65536 random numbers). In the present embodiment, the random number value in the extraction range is set to 0 to 65535 for convenience, but it goes without saying that it is not limited to this. When the extraction range of the random numbers is expanded, the range of the random number values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased accordingly, so that the phenomenon that a specific random number value is biasedly extracted is unlikely to occur.

Within the above extraction range, a random number value corresponding to each winning combination is further assigned in advance. For example, when the random number value corresponding to the winning combination “BB1” is selected from the random number values within the extraction range (“0” to “65535” in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment), the result of the internal lottery Means "winning BB1", and the condition device BB1 is processed as an information command in the game. Further, by utilizing this, the winning probability of BB1 (probability that BB1 is selected as a result of the internal lottery, lottery probability) can be calculated from the random number value corresponding to the extraction range and BB1. In the example of FIG. 49, the winning probability of BB1 in the general state is [total number of random number values corresponding to BB1/total number of random number values within the extraction range] is 384/65536.

In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined, and these random numbers are called winning values corresponding to each winning combination. Further, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of a predetermined winning combination is set to consecutive random number values “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4” within the extraction range, the winning combination of this predetermined winning combination is obtained. The value range is from random number values “1” to “4”. When it is determined (matched) that the extracted random number value corresponds to any one of the random number values “1” to “4”, it means that “the predetermined winning combination is won” as a result of the internal lottery. Note that in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, a single winning combination (eg, BB1, BB2, watermelon, cherry, common bell, maintenance replay) that wins only one winning combination is prepared. However, as described above, in addition to such a single winning combination, a simultaneous winning combination in which a plurality of winning combinations simultaneously wins may be prepared. When such a duplicated combination is prepared, the winning value of the duplicated combination is also included in the above winning value.

From this, the range of the winning value is determined for all winning combinations, and it is determined by the internal lottery whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of the winning value of any winning combination. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the winning value range of any winning combination, it is lost. That is, the range of the winning value of the loss is outside the range of the winning value of all winning combinations. The winning value may also be referred to as the winning allowance value.

By the way, a single winning combination corresponds to one winning combination with respect to one extracted random number value, and a simultaneous winning combination has a plurality (eg, two) winning combinations with respect to one extracted random number value. Corresponds to. That is, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that the winning combination has been won. At this time, the condition devices corresponding to the respective winning combinations of the plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously established (operation is allowed). However, even if a plurality of condition devices corresponding to each winning combination are simultaneously established, since the priority of the condition device for the simultaneous winning combination is set, actually, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition devices are set. It is not always possible to stop on the active line. For example, if the replay combination and the bonus combination are simultaneously elected, and if the replay combination is prioritized, the reel stop processing of step S5 is performed so that the replay combination is prioritized. Since the corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the activated line regardless of the pressing order and the pressing timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be stopped on the activated line and is always the replay combination. The symbol combination will be stopped.

Further, according to FIG. 49, during the bonus, the hit value of the push-order-independent bell (common bell), which can expect winning (or establishment) regardless of the push timing and the push order in the stop operation, occupies the entire extraction range. ing. Then, in the present embodiment, when the replay is established, the next game is provided without consuming medals, and when the push order unquestioned bell is won, eight medals are paid out. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed, a large amount of medals are paid out during the execution period (during the bonus) of the bonus game.

[10-3. RT state control processing]
The RT state control process performed in the slot machine 1 will be described below.

[10-3-1. RT state transition control processing]
FIG. 52 is an example of a block diagram showing the transition of the RT state. The RT state transition control is executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

When the data value in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 is cleared (RAM cleared), the general state (RT0) is set. The replay composition probability in the general state (combination probability of sustain replay role, up replay role 1, up replay role 2, down replay role, 7-set replay role, and 7-set fake replay role) is about 1/7.3. . In such a general state, when the game is executed for a certain period, the number of medals bet by the player for executing the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period. . That is, the general state is a state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game. Note that, in FIG. 52, the replay combining probability is expressed as the RP combining probability.

In the general state, the reel stop button 211 is not stopped in the proper order even if any one of the “push order bell 1” to the “push order bell 6” is selected by the internal lottery, and 0 bell When the zeroth line is displayed on the activated line, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from the general state to RT1. The replay synthesis probability at RT1 is about 1/7.3. In such RT1, when the game is executed for a certain period, the number of medals bet by the player to execute the game is more than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period, as in the general state. There will be more.

At RT1, when “up rep 1+normal maintenance rep” is selected by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of up rep 1 is displayed on the activated line, the CPU 1110 shifts from RT1 to RT2. Control. When the RT state shifts from RT1 to RT2, the basic ART game is started on condition that the player has won the ART first win lottery, and the basic ART is in progress. In this specification, a general term for a game in the basic ART, a special zone to be described later, and a special zone in preparation is called an ART game. However, when the player shifts from RT1 to RT2 in a state where he/she has not won the ART initial win lottery, the basic ART game is not started, and the instruction function display and the ART game number addition lottery described later are not performed.

During the ART game, the ART game with the ART function is executed. Specifically, when any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery, the CPU 1110 controls so that an instruction function display described later is performed. Further, the sub-board 510 also controls so that display is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409. The replay synthesis probability at RT2 is about 1/16. In such RT2, when the game is executed for a certain period, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game becomes larger than the number of medals bet by the player to execute the game within the certain period. That is, in RT2 in which the instruction function display is performed, when the player executes the game, the number of medals increases accordingly. However, the ART game ends with 100 games unless the number of ART games described later is added and the lottery is won. Specifically, if the number of ART games is added to the number of ART games during the ART game, the number of ART games is increased, and the ART games are continued until the number of added ART games other than the above 100 games is exhausted. The indication function is displayed. On the other hand, when the number of ART games is not increased and the lottery is not won, the instruction function display described below is displayed from the start of the basic ART game to the exhaustion of 100 games. finish. At the same time, the display on the sub-board 510 according to the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 is also ended. That is, even if any one of the "push order bell 1" to the "push order bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery, the proper stop operation sequence of the reel stop button 211 is not clearly shown. Then, when the 0-th page zero-zero is displayed on the activated line, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from RT2 to RT1. Even if the basic ART game is over, RT2 is maintained until the 0-bell zero is displayed on the activated line. Therefore, although the right to execute the replay game is frequently given, the instruction function display is displayed. It will not be done.

In this example, the ART game is managed until the specified number of games such as 100 games is exhausted, but instead of this, until the specified number of medals, for example, 100 net increase, is net added. You may make it manage the number of sheets which an ART game continues.

During the basic ART, when any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery, the proper stop operation sequence of the reel stop button 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display. Therefore, as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated in accordance with the instruction function display, the RT state is maintained at RT2 (however, when the symbol combination corresponding to the rising rep 2 is displayed, the process proceeds to RT3). However, even though one of the “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery and the proper stop operation sequence of the reel stop button 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display, If the reel stop button 211 is not operated in accordance with this instruction function display, the zero-bell zero is displayed on the activated line, and the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 controls to shift from RT2 to RT1.

At RT2, when “up rep 2+normal maintenance rep” is selected by the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line, control is performed so as to shift from RT2 to RT3. When the RT state is changed from RT2 to RT3, the special zone is set, and the ART game is added with a high probability (details will be described later). In this RT3 as well, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 displays an instruction function display to be described later when any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery. To be controlled. Further, the sub-board 510 also controls so that display is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

The specialization zone ends with 5 games. Specifically, when "Lower Lip + Normal Maintenance Rep" is selected in the internal lottery, if it is in the specialized zone (if 5 games have not been exhausted), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination will be The display is controlled so that the instruction function display, which will be described later, is displayed. On the other hand, when "Lower Lip + Normal Maintenance Lip" is selected in the internal lottery, if 5 games have been consumed since the specialization zone was started, the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay role will be displayed. In addition, control is performed so that an instruction function display described later is performed (see FIG. 49 for both). Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lowered replay combination is displayed, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from RT3 to RT2. Further, when the zero-sheet zero-zero mark is displayed on the activated line at RT3, the CPU 1110 controls to shift the RT state from RT3 to RT1. The replay combining probability at RT3 is about 1/16. It should be noted that when five games have been consumed since the specialization zone was started, but the symbol combination corresponding to the lowered replay combination is not yet displayed, the basic ART game is controlled under the RT state of RT3. The ART lottery state at this time is a high-probability state. Therefore, even during the special zone or during the special zone preparation, as in the basic ART, when any one of the “push order bell 1” to the “push order bell 6” is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button is selected. The proper stop operation sequence of 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display, and the RT state is maintained at RT3 as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated in accordance with the instruction function display, but the reel is not followed according to the instruction function display. When the stop button 211 is operated to display the 0-sheet bell zero line on the activated line, the process moves to RT1.

In any of the general state, RT1, RT2 and RT3, when the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated (when the bonus is established), the bonus is in the inside. The inside of bonus is a state in which the bonus flag is established but the bonus game is not yet started. In other words, when the bonus combination is won in the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated, but the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is the effective line in the game won in the internal lottery. Even if it is not displayed in, the game continues to operate until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in the activated line in the subsequent games. The replay combining probability inside the bonus is about 1/7.3. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus symbol is displayed on the activated line inside the bonus (when the bonus is won), the bonus game is started and the bonus is in progress. During such a bonus, when the game is played for a certain period, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game becomes larger than the number of medals bet by the player to execute the game within the certain period. .. Then, when the bonus game ends, the game returns to the general state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 controls the RT state to any one of the general state (RT0 state), the RT1 state, the RT2 state, the RT3 state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state. It On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the ART function, and the execution of the ART game by the ART function is basically controlled by a system different from such RT state control. It As described above, the ART game by the ART function is mainly executed in RT2 and RT3, but if the execution condition of the ART game is satisfied (for example, winning the ART execution lottery), any RT state is set. , ART games can be executed. However, this is not the case when the restriction of the rule or the like is violated, and for example, the ART game cannot be executed in the bonus state. In the following, the control processing of the state related to the ART function will be described in detail.

[10-3-2. Lottery related to ART]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following lottery is performed as a lottery related to ART. First, there are an ART first win lottery and an ART first win lottery state transition lottery as a lottery related to ART performed in a normal game state which is neither an ART game nor a bonus. Further, as lottery related to ART performed during the ART game (during the basic ART, during the specialized zone, or during preparation for the specialized zone), there are a specialized zone lottery and an additional lottery for the ART game. In addition, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 has the first ART state as the lottery state related to the ART in the normal game state (non-ART, RT1, RT2 and RT3 in which the instruction function is not generated) which is neither the ART game nor the bonus. When it is controlled to one of a plurality of lottery states (non-lottery state, hell state, non-ART medium low probability state, non-ART medium high probability state) with different winning lottery advantageous degrees, and when it is neither a normal game state nor a bonus ( During the ART game), a plurality of lottery states (ART medium low probability state, ART medium high probability state, special zone, special zone preparing) with different advantages of special zone lottery and ART game number lottery Control either.

As described above, the CPU 1110 sets the lottery state related to ART to the non-ART medium/low probability state and the non-ART state when the game state is in the normal game state neither in the ART game nor in the bonus state, and in neither the non-lottery state nor the hell state. Although controlled to one of the medium-high probability state, a general term of the lottery states (non-ART medium low probability state and non-ART medium high probability state) related to these ARTs is called a non-ART medium lottery state.

In the no-lottery state, the internal lottery is performed but the ART initial hit lottery is not performed, and the ceiling game number is not set. The hell state is the state in which the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is the lowest among the plurality of non-ART lottery states, except for the non-lottery state. In the hell state in this example, the probability of winning the ART first win lottery is set to be lower than both the non-ART medium low probability state and the non-ART medium high probability state. The probability of winning the ART first win when one game is executed in the hell state is the probability that a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) will be selected in the internal lottery, and the internal lottery. This is a combined probability with the winning probability of the direct ART in the transfer destination determination lottery (step S636) when the special role is selected in.

The non-ART medium/low probability state has a relatively low probability of winning in the ART first win lottery performed in the normal time (when the game number management process is being performed and the ART game is not being performed (ART flag is OFF)). It is a lottery state to be performed. The non-ART medium-high probability state is a lottery state in which the winning probability is relatively high in the ART initial win lottery performed in the normal time. The specific winning probability of the ART first win lottery is as shown in FIG. 62 described later. The ART first win lottery is normally performed for each game for each condition device as a result of the internal lottery depending on whether the state is the non-ART medium low probability state or the non-ART medium high probability state. However, in the present embodiment, in both the non-ART medium low probability state and the non-ART medium high probability state, it is possible to win the ART first win only when the rare small role watermelon or cherry is selected in the internal lottery. Is configured. When the ART first win lottery is won, the number of ceiling games is set to 32 in this example. Then, when 32 games, which are the number of ceiling games, are exhausted, the reel stop button 211 is set to “right-middle-” when “raise lip 1+normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery in the subsequent games. The CPU 1110 displays the instruction function so that the sub-board 510 displays the instruction function so that the CPU 1110 performs a stop operation in the pressing order of “left” (reverse pressing), and also displays the instruction function of the instruction function determined by the main board 409. .. When the player operates the reel stop button 211 in accordance with this instruction, the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, the RT state shifts from RT1 to RT2, and the ART game (specifically, Is the basic ART game).

In addition, the probability of winning the ART first win when one game is executed in the normal time is the probability that a rare small role is selected in the internal lottery and the rare small role is selected in the internal lottery. It is a combined probability with the winning probability in the ART first win lottery.

The CPU 1110 determines, based on the result of the non-ART mid-lottery state transition lottery, which one of the non-ART mid-low probability state and the non-ART mid-high probability state to control the non-ART mid-term lottery state at the normal time. To do. This non-ART mid-lottery state transition lottery is performed using a non-art mid-lottery state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 63 described later. In the non-ART medium/low probability state, the transition lottery to the non-ART medium/high probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device operated in response to the result of the internal lottery. Further, in the non-ART medium/high probability state, the transition lottery to the non-ART medium/low probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. The specific transition probability in the non-ART lottery state transition lottery is as shown in FIG. 63 described later. Note that "Low" shown in FIG. 63 means "non-ART medium low probability state", and "High" shown in FIG. 63 also means "non-ART medium high probability state". The ART first win lottery and the non-ART lottery state transition lottery are both executed each time the internal lottery is performed (each time the game is executed).

Further, during the ART game, the CPU 1110 controls the lottery state related to ART to any one of the ART medium low probability state, the ART medium high probability state, the specialized zone preparation state, and the specialized zone state. The ART medium low probability state, the ART medium high probability state, the specialized zone preparation state, and the specialized zone state are collectively referred to as the ART medium lottery state. The ART medium/low probability state is a lottery state in which the winning probability in the special zone lottery or the ART game number addition lottery that is performed at a non-normal time (ART flag ON) is performed with a relatively low probability. The ART medium-high probability state is a lottery state in which the winning probability in the special zone lottery or the ART game number addition lottery that is performed at a non-normal time (ART flag ON) is performed with a relatively high probability. The special zone preparation state is the lottery state when the special zone lottery is won but the special zone is not yet started (that is, the special zone lottery is won, but the RT state is not yet transitioned to RT3. State). The specialization zone state is a lottery state in the specialization zone.

As described above, both the specialized zone state and the specialized zone preparation state are the lottery states related to the ART controlled when the special zone lottery is won in the ART medium low probability state or the ART medium high probability state. is there. Further, the CPU 1110 only during the control to the ART medium low probability state and the ART medium high probability state, the ART lottery state in the basic ART (lottery state relating to ART which is not in the specialization zone or the specialization zone preparation). Which of the above-mentioned ART medium low probability state and ART medium high probability state is to be controlled is determined based on the result of the ART medium lottery state transition lottery. This lot drawing state transition during ART is performed by using a lottery table during ART state change lottery table shown in FIG. 64 described later. In the ART medium/low probability state, the transition lottery to the ART medium/high probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device operated in response to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, in the ART medium-high probability state, the transition lottery to the ART medium-low probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device that operates corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. The specific transition probability in the ART lottery state transition lottery is as shown in FIG. 64 described later.

The specific winning probability in the specialized zone lottery is as shown in FIG. 65 described later. The special zone lottery is performed every game in a non-normal time in accordance with the ART lottery state and the condition device operated as a result of the internal lottery. If you win the specialized zone lottery, when "Up Lip 2 + Normal Maintenance Lip" is selected in the internal lottery in the subsequent games, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "Right-Left-Middle" (reverse The CPU 1110 displays an instruction function so that the sub-board 510 displays the instruction function determined by the main board 409 so that the sub-board 510 can perform a stop operation by pinching. When the player operates the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction, the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line, the RT state shifts from RT2 to RT3, and the specialized zone is started. It However, in the present embodiment, the special zone can be won only when a watermelon, a cherry, or a loss is selected in the internal lottery in the ART medium low probability state or the ART medium high probability state. Therefore, in the specialized zone state and the specialized zone preparation state, the result of the specialized zone lottery is always non-win. The specialized zone state ends in 5 games as described above. Thereafter, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lowered replay combination is displayed, the process shifts from RT3 to RT2, and the ART lottery state at this time is controlled to a high probability state.

The number-of-arts lottery lottery is performed only when the special zone lottery is not won according to the lottery state during ART and the condition device operated as a result of the internal lottery. In the ART game number addition lottery, an addition determination lottery for deciding whether or not to add the ART game number and an addition game for deciding the number of games to be added when it is decided to add the ART game number The number determination lottery is included. The specific winning probability in the addition determination lottery is as shown in FIG. 57 described later. The specific winning probability in the additional game number determination lottery is as shown in FIGS. 58 to 61 described later.

The additional game number determination lottery is a lottery performed when the additional game number determination lottery is won, and the specific lottery probability in the additional game number determination lottery is, in the ART middle low probability state, using FIG. 58 described later. , The number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery. Further, in the ART medium-high probability state, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery, using FIG. 59 described later. Similarly, when in the specialized zone, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery by using FIG. 60 described later, and when the specialized zone is being prepared, FIG. 61 described later is used. Then, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery.

[10-3-3. Instruction function processing]
As described in step S31 of FIG. 50, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the main board 409 selects a winning combination by the internal lottery processing in step S3 (see FIG. 49 for the lottery table). When the central processing of the instruction function processing is performed by 409 and the generation of the instruction is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) indicates the instruction function of the same content. Can be displayed as an effect on another display device (navigation display, instruction generation effect). Although the display modes of the instruction function display and the navigation display may be various, both displays are required to have display contents according to the instruction contents of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining a rough processing flow of the instruction function processing. In FIG. 53, regarding the instruction function processing performed by the slot machine 1, a series of processing executed by the main board 409 and a series of processing executed by the sub-board 510 upon receiving a command from the main board 409 are shown together. ing. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the flow of the game including the processing procedure relating to the generation of the instruction function executed by the main board 409 in the instruction function processing shown in FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the processing continued from FIG. 54 and showing an example when the game number management processing is being performed and the ART game is not being performed. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing continued from FIG. 54 and when the game number management processing is not in progress. Here, first, the outline of the instruction function processing will be described with reference to FIG. 53, and in [10-3-4] and thereafter, the processing procedure relating to the generation of the instruction function will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56 and the like. The flow of the game will be described including.

Although various flags are used in the following description of the instruction function processing, these flags are used in the memory (for example, the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 and the RAM 1122 of the sub-board 510) in the board that executes the instruction function processing. This is an internal flag that is held, and the value or the like is rewritten or read by the CPU or the like (eg, CPU 1110 or CPU 1118) of each board. Further, when the flags of the same name are used between the main board 409 and a peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510), it is basically assumed that these internal flags have a common data format. The value of the flag is synchronized by transmitting a signal such as a command to the.

In addition to the above internal flags, variable data may be used. These variable data are also stored in the memory of the board that refers to the variable data (for example, in the case of the main board 409, the RAM 1114 and the sub-board 510). In this case, the value is stored in the RAM 1122), and the value is read or rewritten by the CPU or the like (for example, the CPU 1110 in the case of the main board 409, the CPU 1118 in the case of the sub board 510).

First, in step S61 of FIG. 53, the main board 409 executes processing relating to whether or not to generate the instruction function (processing relating to generation of the instruction function). More specifically, the winning or failing of the ART first win lottery is determined, whether or not the ART game can be started, and the number of continued ART games are determined.

When it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated as a result of the processing related to the generation of the instruction function, the main board 409 causes the special display LED 612 to display the instruction function display based on the winning combination of the game. Processing is performed (step S62). By this instruction function display, it is possible to show an appropriate stop order of the push order small winning combination established during the ART, or to show that a predetermined symbol should be arranged in the predetermined stop order.

In addition, in the case of the game in which it is determined in step S61 that the main board 409 does not need to display the instruction function, the specific display function display by the special display LED 612 is not performed in step S62.

While the main board 409 displays the instruction function in step S62 based on the result of the process related to the generation of the instruction function in step S61, the same information as the display content (instruction content) in the instruction function display is given by a command or the like. It is transmitted to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) (instruction information command). When the indication function display is not performed, the fact may be notified by the indication information command, or the indication information command may not be transmitted. However, if the instruction information command is not transmitted, it is necessary for the receiving side to determine that the command has not been received after a predetermined time has elapsed. By doing so, the peripheral board (sub-board 510) can recognize whether or not the instruction function display is performed in the game, based on the reception of the instruction information command. Display contents (instruction contents) can also be understood.

Then, the peripheral board (here, the sub-board 510) that has received the instruction information command from the main board 409 performs the processing shown in steps S63 to S65 of FIG. 53 based on the information included in the instruction information command. In the instruction function processing shown in FIG. 53, the processing relating to the generation of the instruction function (step S61) is first executed by the main board 409, but the subsequent processing by the main board 409 and the sub-board 510 (specifically, Does not limit the execution timing of the processing of step S62 and the processing of steps S63 to S65).

First, in step S63, it is determined whether or not the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) displays (or has performed) the instruction function display in the game, and the indication function display is (or has been performed). ) (YES in step S63), the instruction generation effect process is performed as the process in step S64. If the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) determines in step S63 that the instruction function display is not performed (or was not performed) (NO in step S63), the peripheral board is instructed as the processing in step S65. Performs function-related processing.

The instruction generation effect process in step S64 is an "instruction generation effect" that teaches the player the stop order and stop position (target symbol, that is, the timing of the stop operation) of the reel 301 on the image display body 500 and other display devices. Is a process for displaying a so-called ART navigation or the like. Note that the teaching content shown to the player by the instruction generation effect is limited to that according to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display processing. For example, it is not permissible that the teaching content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is "reverse push" even though the instruction content indicating the "forward push" is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display. Even if the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating “forward pressing” and the instruction of the instruction generation effect content indicates “the left reel 301a should be stopped first”, the second instruction after that. Even if the reel 301b to be stopped is not taught, it is not allowed. In addition, the fact that the teaching content by the instruction generation effect is limited to that according to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 is not limited to the above-described pressing order, but is a guideline of the pushing position in the instruction function display. Also applies when is determined. That is, for example, although the instruction content indicating the “red 7 symbol should be aimed at by all reels” is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display, the teaching content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is “BAR symbol”. It is not permissible to be "aim to aim at" or "to aim at the red 7 symbol only on some reels".

In addition, regarding a specific effect form of the instruction generation effect, various effect modes such as displaying the pressing order and the symbols on the liquid crystal screen, lighting the LEDs associated with the reels 301a to 301c, and the like are conventionally known. However, any one or a combination thereof may be used.

The instruction function-related processing in step S65 is related to the instruction function when the instruction function display is not displayed on the special display LED 612 (for example, a game in non-ART or a game in which no winning order is selected in the push order even in ART). This is processing for displaying a predetermined effect screen and the like. It should be noted that, among the above-mentioned "push-order-independent winning combinations", not only the prize-winning combination in which you can expect to pay the maximum number of coins regardless of how you play at the time of winning, such as a push-order-independent winning bell, depends on the game method. It also includes winning roles where you cannot expect the maximum number of payouts or you cannot get the payouts. To be more specific, not only is the winning combination (eg, watermelon combination) that can be obtained when playing with a game method that is expected to give the maximum payout (corresponding to the above-mentioned “maximum efficiency batting method”), A winning combination that cannot be obtained when playing in the "maximum efficiency batting method" (for example, a symbol combination using a symbol arranged on the opposite side of the symbol arrangement of the reel 301 from the symbol combination of the above watermelon role is prepared, It is a single winning combination that is determined as a winning by stopping the symbol combination, and includes a so-called chance winning combination.

The instruction function processing is ended by performing the processing of steps S61 to S65 described above. Hereinafter, each process (step S61 to step S65) performed as the instruction function process by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 will be described in detail.

[10-3-4. Processing related to generation of instruction function]
The flow of the game, including the processing relating to the generation of the instruction function shown in step S61 of FIG. 53, will be described with reference to FIGS. 54, 55, and 56 while showing a specific example of the extraction table.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 54, it is determined whether the game number management flag is ON. The number-of-games management flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the number-of-games management process is in progress. When it is ON, the number-of-games management process is in progress (that is, the ART lottery state is a non-ART lottery state or It means that it is in the ART lottery state), and when it is OFF, it means that it is not the game number management process (that is, the ART lottery state is the no-lottery state or the hell state). When the game number management flag is ON (YES in step S601), the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not the number of games counted during the game number management process (the number of games executed by the player while the game number management flag is set to ON) is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold value. (Step S602). The predetermined threshold is a value that is set so that the number of medals as a game medium paid out to a player in one shot (one game number management process) does not exceed a specified value. In this example, when the prescribed value is N, the value obtained by dividing N by the tilt value (the net number of increase per game) is set as the upper limit value G, and the number of bonus games ending in the shortest is subtracted from the upper limit value G. The value is set as a predetermined threshold. For example, when it is specified that the number of game media to be paid out to the player in one game number management process does not exceed 3000, the inclination value is 2 [sheets/game] and the shortest bonus game number is 34 games. Then, the 1466 game is set as the predetermined threshold. However, if the slot machine is not equipped with a bonus game, the upper limit value G is set as the threshold value.

When the number of games counted during the game number management process is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value (YES in step S602), the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether the ART flag is ON. The ART flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not an ART game is in progress. When it is ON, it means that ART is in progress. When it is OFF, it is not in ART, that is, , Means not in ART. When the ART flag is ON (YES in step S603), it is determined whether the special zone is not in progress (step S604).

When it is determined in step S604 that the specialized zone is not in effect (YES in step S604), the specialized zone lottery described above is performed using the specialized zone lottery table in FIG. 65 (step S605). When the special zone lottery in step S605 is won (YES in step S606), the process proceeds to step S607, and the CPU 1110 performs the RT state transition process.

The RT state transition process of step S607 is a process of transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when the "increase lip 2+normal maintenance lip" is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated, so that the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "right-left-middle" (reverse pinching). The indication function is displayed so that the push operation can be stopped. When the player stops the reel stop button 211 according to the instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line, and the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT2 to RT3. When the special zone lottery is won, the ART lottery state is shifted from the ART medium/low probability state or the ART medium/high probability state to the special zone preparation state. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line, the special zone preparation state is shifted to the special zone state.

In step S608, the addition determination lottery is performed. In the addition determination lottery in step S608, whether or not the number of ART games is to be added is first drawn, and when it is determined that the number of ART games is added (YES in step S609), the process proceeds to the addition game number determination lottery in step S610. A lottery will be drawn on whether to add the game. Then, the number of additional games determined in the additional game number determination lottery is added (step S611). As described above, the addition determination lottery is performed using FIG. 57, and the addition game number determination lottery is performed using FIGS. 58 to 61. FIG. 57 is an example of a lottery table used for the additional determination lottery, FIG. 58 is an example of a lottery table used for the additional game number determination lottery in the ART medium low probability state, and FIG. 59 is an ART medium high probability state. Is an example of a lottery table used for the additional game number determination lottery, FIG. 60 is an example of a lottery table used for the additional game number determination lottery in the specialized zone, and FIG. 61 is preparing for the specialized zone. 2 is an example of a lottery table used in a lottery for determining the number of games to be added to.

When it is determined in step S604 that the special zone is in effect (NO in step S604), steps S605, S606, and S607 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S608. When it is determined in step S606 that the special zone lottery in step S605 is lost (NO in step S606), step S607 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S608.

In step S612, the ART lottery state transition lottery is performed using the ART lottery state transition lottery table shown in FIG. As described above, the ART lottery state transition lottery is a lottery for deciding whether to control the ART lottery state in the basic ART to the ART medium low probability state or the ART medium high probability state. Then, the during-ART lottery state transition processing of step S614 is performed based on the result of the during-ART lottery state transition lottery in step S612.

More specifically, in the ART medium/low probability state, referring to “Low→High” in FIG. 64, the transition lottery to the ART medium/high probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. Is performed (step S612), and if the transition lottery is won (YES in step S613), the state is shifted to the ART medium-high probability state (step S614). If the transfer lottery in step S612 is lost (NO in step S613), step S614 is skipped, the process related to the generation of the instruction function is ended, and the ART medium/low probability state is maintained. In addition, in the ART medium-high probability state, with reference to "high-to-low" in FIG. 64, the transition lottery to the ART medium-low probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. If it is determined that the transition lottery is won (step S612) (YES in step S613), the transition to the ART medium/low probability state is controlled (step S614). If the transfer lottery in step S612 is lost (NO in step S613), step S614 is skipped, the process related to the generation of the instruction function is ended, and the ART medium-high probability state is maintained. The during-ART lottery state transition lottery in step S612 is performed using the during-ART lottery state transition lottery table shown in FIG. FIG. 64 is a lottery table used in the lottery state transition lottery during ART. In addition, "low" shown in FIG. 64 means "ART medium low probability state", and "high" shown in FIG. 64 also means "ART medium high probability state". The ART lottery state transition lottery is executed every time the internal lottery is performed (each time the game is executed) in both the ART medium high probability state and the ART medium low probability state.

If it is determined that the player has failed the additional determination lottery in step S608 (NO in step S609), the process advances to step S619 to determine whether or not the ART game is finished. In the end determination of the ART game performed in step S619, when all the ART games to be executed are exhausted, it is determined to be the end (YES in step S619), the ART flag is turned off (step S620), and the instruction function is performed. The flag is turned off (step S621). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S619 that the ART game to be executed has not been digested (NO in step S619), the process proceeds to step S612 and the ART game is continued.

When it is determined in step S602 that the number of games executed by the player in the game number management process exceeds a predetermined threshold value (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S615, and the ART flag is ON. It is determined whether or not.

If it is determined in step S615 that the ART flag is ON (YES in step S615), the ART flag is set to OFF (step S616), and the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S617). The game number management flag is set to OFF (step S618). That is, when the number of games counted during the number-of-games management process reaches a predetermined threshold value, even if the ART game is in the middle (the condition for ending the ART game is not satisfied (the specified number of games ( Even if 100 games are not digested in this example), the ART game being executed is forcibly ended midway.

The number-of-games management flag is not limited to being set to OFF when the number of games counted during the number-of-games management process reaches a threshold, and when the ART lottery state is changed from the no-lottery state to the hell state. It may be set to OFF.

Further, in this example, as an advantageous game in which medals as game media increase as the game progresses, an ART game accompanied by operation of an instruction function and a bonus combination (BB1, BB2) are selected by internal lottery. Thus, a bonus game executed by operating these condition devices is prepared. Here, as described above, when the number of games counted during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold during the execution of the ART game, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the ART game Even if it is in the middle, it will be forced to end. However, even if the number of games counted during the number-of-games management process reaches a predetermined threshold during the execution of the bonus game, the number-of-games management flag is not set to OFF but is kept in the ON state. The bonus game does not end forcibly in the middle of the game. Then, based on the end of the bonus game (in this example, the payout of 300 medals is the end condition of the bonus game), the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF. That is, since the bonus combination is not selected by the internal lottery during the execution of the bonus game (see FIG. 49), even if the number of games counted during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold value, The number-of-games management flag may be set to ON based on the end of the bonus game. On the other hand, during execution of the ART game, a bonus combination may be selected by internal lottery (see FIG. 49). Therefore, when the number of games counted during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold, Even if the ART game is in the middle, it ends.

In this example, when the number of games counted during the number-of-games management process reaches a predetermined threshold during the execution of the ART game, the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF (the relevant ART game is Although it is forced to end even if it is in the middle), if it is a gaming machine that does not have a bonus game installed (a gaming machine in which a bonus role is not selected by internal lottery), Instead of the threshold value, the game number management flag is turned off when the above-mentioned upper limit value (when the prescribed value is N, the number of N is divided by the inclination value (net additional number per game)) is reached. It may be set (forcibly ended even if the ART game is in the middle).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S615 that the ART flag is OFF (NO in step S615), steps S616 and S617 are skipped, the process proceeds to step S618, and the game number management flag is set to OFF.

That is, when the number of games counted during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold value, the game number management process is ended. In other words, unless the number of games counted during the number-of-games management process reaches a predetermined threshold value, the number-of-games management process is continued.

Next, the processing when the ART flag is OFF in step S603 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. In this case, since the number-of-games management process is in progress (YES in step S601 and YES in step S602) and the ART game is not in progress (NO in step S603), any one of the omen game state, the end standby state, and the withdrawal state is performed. It is.

When it is determined in step S603 that the ART flag is OFF (NO in step S603), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs ART first win lottery using the ART first win lottery table of FIG. 62 (step S622). If the ART first win lottery in step S622 is won (YES in step S623), the process proceeds to step S625, and ceiling game number setting processing is performed (step S625). In this ceiling game number setting process, 32 games are set as the ceiling game number. However, the number of ceiling games set in the ceiling game number setting process is not limited to 32 games, and may be a number shorter than 32 games. It should be noted that since the ceiling game number has already been set in the precursor game state, the number of remaining games in the precursor game state may be shorter than 32 games. In this case, the number of ceiling games may be determined to be shorter than the number of remaining games, the initial ART game may be executed twice, or the probability of winning the specialized zone may be increased during the ART game. You may be allowed to.

When the ceiling game number is set in step S625, the process proceeds to step S626, and it is determined whether or not the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the ceiling game number is 0.

If it is determined in step S623 that the ART flag is ON (NO in step S623), step S625 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S626.

If it is determined in step S626 that the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the ceiling game count is 0 (YES in step S626), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S627) and the instruction function flag is set to ON. (Step S628), the process proceeds to Step S629, and the RT state transition process is performed.

The RT state transition process of step S629 is a process of transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when the “increase rep 1+normal maintenance rep” is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the “right-middle-left” push order (reverse push). ) The instruction function is displayed so that it is stopped. When the player operates the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, and the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT1 to RT2. Then, the ART flag is set to ON on condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed (step S630). However, if the player does not comply with this even though "raise rep 1+normal maintenance rep" is not selected in the internal lottery or the instruction function display is displayed, in step S629, RT1 to RT2 Despite the fact that the control to shift to is not performed, the ART flag of step S630 is set to ON. It is to be noted that the instruction function display is performed when "raise REP 1+normal maintenance REP" is selected in the internal lottery until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed. In other words, when “up rep 1+normal maintenance rep” is selected in the internal lottery at RT 1, when the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, control is performed to shift to RT 2 However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 1 is not displayed on the activated line because the instruction function display is not followed, RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON.

If the RT state when the RT state transition process of step S629 is performed is RT2, the ART flag is set to ON.

If the RT state when the RT state transition process of step S629 is performed is RT3, the ART flag is set to ON as in RT2, but since the special zone lottery has not been won, When "Lower Lip + Normal Maintenance Lip" is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is stopped in the "middle-left-right" push order (the push order in which the lower lip is aligned). The indication function is displayed on. Furthermore, when "7 sets of rep + normal maintenance rep" or "7 of rep lip + normal maintenance rep" is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in any order other than "right-middle-left". The instruction function is displayed so that the stop operation is performed (normally, the push order in which the lips are aligned).

When it is determined in step S626 that the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the ceiling game number is not 0 (NO in step S626), the CPU 1110 uses the non-ART lottery state transition lottery table of FIG. 63 to perform the non-ART lottery. A state transition lottery is performed (step S631). This non-ART mid-lottery state transition lottery is, as described above, a lottery that determines which of the non-ART mid-low probability state and the non-ART mid-high probability state is to be controlled. More specifically, in the non-ART medium/low probability state, referring to “Low→High” in FIG. 63, the probability of changing to the non-ART medium/high probability state is set with a probability according to the condition device operated in response to the result of the internal lottery. A transition lottery is performed (step S631), and if this transition lottery is won (YES in step S632), transition control to a non-ART medium-high probability state is performed (step S633). On the other hand, if the player fails to win the non-ART lottery state transition lottery in step S631 (NO in step S632), step S633 is skipped, the process related to the generation of the instruction function is completed, and the non-ART medium low probability state is maintained. . Further, in the non-ART medium/high probability state, referring to “high→low” in FIG. 63, the transition lottery to the non-ART medium/low probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. Is performed (step S631), and if the transition lottery is won (YES in step S632), the transition control to the non-ART medium low probability state is performed (step S633). On the other hand, if the player is defeated in the non-ART mid-lottery state transition lottery in step S631 (NO in step S632), step S633 is skipped, the process related to the generation of the instruction function is terminated, and the non-ART mid-high probability state is maintained. Note that "Low" shown in FIG. 63 means "non-ART medium low probability state", and "High" shown in FIG. 63 also means "non-ART medium high probability state". The non-ART medium lottery state transition lottery is executed every time the internal lottery is performed (each time the game is executed) in both the non-ART medium high probability state and the non-ART medium low probability state.

Next, the processing when the game number management flag is OFF in step S601, that is, when the game number management process is not in progress, will be described with reference to FIG. When the game number management process is not being performed, the ART lottery state is either a no-lottery state or a hell state. When the game number management process is not in progress, the slot machine 1 of this example does not control the ART lottery state to the no-lottery state or the hell state based on the number of games executed by the player. However, counting the number of games executed by the player is not excluded unless it is related to the control for changing the ART lottery state to the no-lottery state or the hell state.

When it is determined in step S601 that the number-of-games management flag is OFF (NO in step S601), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the state is a hell state (step S634).

When it is determined in step S634 that the state is the hell state (YES in step S634), the process proceeds to step S635, and whether or not a special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) is won in the internal lottery. Is determined. When it is determined in step S635 that the special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) has been won in the internal lottery (YES in step S635), the destination is changed according to the type of the special combination that has been won. A determination lottery (step S636) is performed. The transfer destination determination lottery is a lottery for determining the ART lottery state of the transfer destination, and is determined to be one of the non-ART medium low probability state, the non-ART medium high probability state, and the direct ART. More specifically, in the internal lottery in the hell state, refer to FIG. 66(a) when the special cherry role is selected, and refer to FIG. 66(b) when the special watermelon role is selected. When the maintenance replay combination is selected, the transfer destination determination lottery is performed with reference to FIG. 66(c).

When the transfer destination determination lottery in step S636 is performed, the process proceeds to step S637, and it is determined whether the result of the transfer destination determination lottery in step S636 is direct ART. When it is determined in step S637 that the result of the transfer destination determination lottery is not the direct ART (YES in step S637), the process proceeds to step S638, and referring to FIG. 67, the ceiling game number determination lottery is performed. When the ceiling game number is determined as a result of the ceiling game number determination lottery, the ceiling game number setting process for setting the determined ceiling game number (step S639) and the game number management flag ON (step (S640), each processing of the precursor flag ON (step S641) is performed. After that, the ART lottery state transition processing (step S642) from the hell state to the ART lottery state determined in the transition destination determination lottery in step S636 is performed. Note that the ART lottery transition processing in step S642 is performed differently depending on whether the ceiling game number is set to 32 games or when the ceiling game number is not set to 32 games. For example, when the ceiling game number is set to 32 games (when YES is determined in step S637 and when 32 game is set in step S639), the ceiling game number is shorter than 32 games. The number of ceiling games is increased by shifting to a lottery state in which the probability of being decided is increased, a lottery state in which the initial ART game may be added, and a lottery state in which the probability of winning the specialized zone during the ART game is increased. If the 32 games are not set (NO in step S637), the non-ART medium low probability state or the non-ART medium high probability state is entered.

If it is determined in step S637 that the result of the transfer destination determination lottery in step S636 is direct ART (NO in step S637), a process of setting the number of ceiling games to 32 games is performed (step S643). When the number of ceiling games is set to 32 in step S643, the process proceeds to step S640, and each process of the game number management flag ON (step S640), the precursor flag ON (step S641), and the ART lottery state transition process (step S642) Is done. In this case (when it is determined in step S637 that the direct ART is won), in the ART lottery state transition processing of step S642, it is more advantageous to the player than when it is determined in step S637 that the direct ART is not won. It is advisable to shift to a special ART lottery state. The special ART lottery state that is more advantageous to the player than when it is determined in step S637 that the direct ART has not been won is the initial ART game addition probability, the ART game continuation probability, the special zone winning probability. And the like indicate states that are preferentially compared with the non-ART medium low probability state and the non-ART medium high probability state.

In this way, when the transition destination determination lottery in step S636 is performed in the hell state, the ceiling game is always set regardless of the result of the lottery. Therefore, the transition destination determination lottery in step S636 is performed in the hell state. It corresponds to the ART first win lottery in.

If it is determined in step S634 that the state is not the hell state (NO in step S634), it is determined that the state is the non-lottery state, and the process related to the generation of the instruction function is ended. In such a non-lottery state, a game in which the internal lottery is executed but the ceiling game is not set (the game in which the ART first hit lottery is not executed) is executed.

By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON is longer than the period in which the game number management flag is set to OFF. That is,
When the number of stay games in the specific section and the number of stay games in the non-specific section are compared, the number of stay games in the specific section is higher. Then, in the hell state as a non-specific section, the winning probability in the advantageous game execution lottery (ART first win lottery) is low, but at the time of shifting to another lottery state (non-ART lottery state, ART lottery state), it is specified It is configured such that the advantageous game can be executed with a higher probability (30% in the present embodiment) than in the section (at least the non-ART medium low probability state). Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the interest while suppressing the gambling property.

[10-3-5. Pull back processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the ART game (basic ART, a general term for games in the specialization zone and preparation for the specialization zone) is finished, the main board is changed according to the RT state when the ART game is finished. The CPU 1110 of 409 controls the pulling back state A or the pulling back state B. The withdrawal state A and the withdrawal state B are essentially one mode of the non-ART during lottery state. However, here, in order to distinguish from the non-ART mid-lottery state (non-ART mid-high probability state, non-ART mid-low probability state) controlled in the normal game state, the lottery state controlled after the ART game is finished , It is called a lottery state after the ART game.

The withdrawal states A and B controlled in the lottery state after the ART game are both not only the non-ART medium/low probability state, but also the winning probability of the ART first win lottery is higher than the non-ART medium/high probability state. It is in a state. The pullback process will be described below.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the RT state is basically not changed from RT2 to RT1 during the basic ART, but the internal lottery results in “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6”. Even if one of them is selected and the proper stop operation sequence of the reel stop button 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display, the reel stop button 211 is not operated in accordance with the instruction function display, so that the 0-bell As described above, when the zeroth line is displayed on the activated line, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 shifts from RT2 to RT1. In this example, as shown in the lottery state determination table after the ART game in FIG. 68, if the RT state at the end of the ART game is RT1, the non-ART lottery after the ART game is finished If the state is controlled to the pull-back state A and the RT state at the time when the final game of the ART game is finished is RT2, the non-ART lottery state after the ART game is finished is controlled to the pull-back state B. ing. Since the lottery state after the ART game is determined according to the RT state at the time when the final game of the ART game is finished, even if the RT state at the time when the final game of the ART game is started is RT2, In the final game, when the 0-belt zero-zero is displayed on the activated line, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT1, and the pullback state A is controlled.

The winning probability of the ART first win lottery in the pullback state A and the pullback state B is as shown in the ART first win lottery table in the pullback state of FIG. As can be seen by comparing FIG. 69 with FIG. 62, in the lottery state after the ART game, in both the pull-back state A and the pull-back state B, the winning of the ART first win lottery is more than in the non-ART lottery state. The probability is set high. Further, comparing the pull-back state A and the pull-back state B, the pull-back state B is more advantageous than the pull-back state A in that it is easier to win the ART initial winning lottery.

As described above, in the lottery state after the ART game, which is controlled in the pullback state A or the pullback state B, the maintenance lottery is performed by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 each time the game is executed. In this maintenance lottery, when the lottery state is the pullback state A after the ART game is over, the maintenance lottery is performed so that there is a 49/50 probability of winning (that is, there is a 1/50 chance of falling), and the ART When the lottery state after the game is in the pullback state B, the maintenance lottery is performed so that the probability of winning is 19/20 (that is, the probability of falling is 1/20). Therefore, when the pullback state A and the pullback state B are compared, although the pullback state B is easier to win the ART first win lottery, the pullback state B is more than the pullback state A after the ART game end lottery state (ART It is difficult to maintain the initial win lottery in a state in which it is more advantageous than in the non-ART lottery state.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the basic ART, during the specialized zone, and during the specialized zone preparation, as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to the instruction function display, the RT2 or RT3 changes to RT1. Although it is not transferred, if the reel stop button 211 is operated without displaying the instruction function display, the transfer from RT2 or RT3 to RT1 may occur. That is, it can be said that it is a game property in which the player is given the right to select whether the lottery state after the ART game is controlled to the pullback state A or the pullback state B. Therefore, it is difficult to win the lottery state after the ART game for the ART first win lottery, but it is easy to maintain the lottery state after the ART game ends (it is difficult to shift to the lottery state during non-ART) pullback state A and the ART first win lottery. It is easy for the player to win the prize, but it is difficult to maintain the lottery state after the ART game is finished (it is easy to shift to the non-ART lottery state). It becomes possible for one to make a choice. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in an ART game, which tends to be monotonous by simply digesting the game. Further, even if the player moves from RT2 or RT3 to RT1 because the reel stop button 211 is operated without following the indication function display, the lottery state after the ART game is easily maintained after the ART game is finished ( Since it is controlled to the withdrawal state A, which is difficult to shift to the non-ART lottery state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In particular, as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated in accordance with the instruction function display during the basic ART, the special zone, and the special zone preparation, the lottery state is controlled to the pull-back state A after the ART game is finished, and therefore the pull-back state B is set. The player who selects is to select a high-risk high-return game as compared to the pullback state A in which the player is likely to be transferred to the non-ART lottery state but is easily won in the ART first win lottery. As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player determines whether the lottery state after the ART game is relatively low risk low return or relatively high risk high return game. Can be selected as desired.

However, when the player tries to select the pullback state B of relatively high risk and high return, the player moves from RT2 or RT3 having a relatively high replay synthesis probability to RT1 having a relatively low replay synthesis probability. Need to take the risk of If the number of remaining games in the ART game is large, it is possible that any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” will be selected by the internal lottery until the ART game is finished. Although the cost is high, the number of medals paid out to the player during the ART game is reduced accordingly (in some cases, the number of medals consumed in the execution of the game is more than the number of medals paid out as an award. There is a risk that it will increase). On the other hand, if the number of remaining games in the ART game is small, it is possible to obtain more medals as awards paid out to the player during the ART game, but before the ART game is finished, the internal lottery is performed. There is a risk that any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" cannot be selected. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state is determined after the ART game is finished according to the RT state at the time when the final game of the ART game is finished. It is preferably transferred. However, one of the “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is not necessarily selected in the internal lottery in the final game of the ART game. Therefore, it is preferable for the player who intends to select the pullback state B so as not to shift to RT1 until the end of the ART game, but it is also possible to shift to RT1 at an early point. You can have fun at what point you should switch to RT1.

Moreover, although some players do not desire the high-risk high-return withdrawal state B themselves, they are erroneous without following the instruction function display performed during the basic ART, specialized zone, and specialized zone preparation. There is also a case where the reel stop button 211 is operated, but rather, it can give a sense of tension to the game during the basic ART, the specialized zone, and the specialized zone preparation. In addition, even if the player does not desire the withdrawal state B, the game is played under the condition that the ART initial win lottery probability is relatively high, and therefore the player does not feel a loss.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is switched from RT2 or RT3 to RT1 during the basic ART, during the specialized zone, or during the specialized zone preparation, the additional game number determination lottery is performed. Even if the game is continued without stopping the progress of the ART game and the like, the lottery state is controlled after the ART game is finished in the pull-back state B in which the ART initial win lottery probability is relatively high, so that a decrease in interest is suppressed. be able to.

When it is decided to lose the lottery state after the ART game and to shift to the non-ART lottery state, the transition destination is determined as follows. FIG. 70 is a lottery table for determining a transfer destination when it is decided to lose the lottery state in the lottery state after the ART game and shift to the non-ART lottery state. According to FIG. 70, in the pull-back state A, if the drawing is lost in the maintenance lottery, the transition probability to the non-ART medium/low probability state and the transition probability to the non-ART medium/high probability state are the same. On the other hand, in the pull-back state B, if the maintenance lottery is lost, the transition probability to the non-ART medium/high probability state is higher than the transition probability to the non-ART medium/low probability state. As described above, the withdrawal state B is relatively high risk in that it is harder to be maintained in the lottery state after the ART game is finished (withdrawal state B) than the withdrawal state A, but it should be shifted to the non-ART lottery state. Even if is determined, there is a high probability that the non-ART medium/low probability state and the non-ART medium/high probability state are transferred to the non-ART medium/high probability state, and the risk degree thereof is reduced. Therefore, for the player, the withdrawal state B is more advantageous than the withdrawal state A, and the withdrawal state B can be urged to the player, and the ART tends to be monotonous to simply digest the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of counting the number of times the game is executed in a normal gaming state, which is neither in the bonus game nor in the ART game (game number counting means). When the number of games counted by the number-of-games counting means reaches a predetermined prescribed number of games (for example, 1600 games), the ART game is started even if the ART initial win lottery is not won. However, the game number counting means does not count the number of times the game is executed when the RT state is RT2 or RT3 after the ART game is finished, and when the RT state is RT1 after the ART game is finished. We try to count the number of times the game is executed. Here, "not counting the number of times the game has been executed" means not counting the number of times the game has been executed toward the specified number of games. Is not counted, and the number of executed games is counted but the prescribed number of games is not set while being controlled by RT2 or RT3, and the prescribed number of games is set after the transition to RT1. Including. The prescribed number of games may be determined in advance, or may be determined by a lottery among a plurality of games.

[10-3-8. Production process at the time of winning]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to perform a production operation lottery based on the result of the internal lottery and execute a production that can give the player a sense of expectation based on the result of the production operation lottery. .. Specifically, the internal lottery result information is command-transmitted from the main board 409 to a peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510 ), and the sub-board 510 that has received this command performs the effect operation lottery based on the internal lottery result information. Then, the effect mode determined by this effect operation lottery is controlled to be displayed on the image display body 500 and the like, and at the same time, the audio effect is also effected.

71 is an effect operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won at RT1, FIG. 72 is an effect operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won at RT2, and FIG. 73 is an effect operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won at RT3. Is. As can be seen from FIGS. 71 to 73, in the internal lottery, BB1, “BB1+watermelon”, “BB1+cherry”, BB2, “BB2+watermelon”, “BB2+cherry”, watermelon, cherry, “push order bell 1” ~ "Push order bell 6", common bell, maintenance replay, "up lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", "up lip 2 + normal maintenance lip", "down lip + normal maintenance lip", "7 sets lip + normal maintenance lip" In addition, when one of a plurality of winning combinations such as “7 complete fake lip+normal maintenance lip” is won, the effect can be executed. Of the plurality of winning combinations, all the winning combinations except the maintenance replay and the “uplifting rep + 1 normal maintaining rep”, regardless of whether the RT status is RT1 to RT3, are The production operation probability is the same. On the other hand, with regard to the maintenance replay and the "uplifting rep 1+normal maintenance rep", the effect operation probabilities when winning in the internal lottery are different depending on whether the RT state is RT1 to RT3.

71 to 73, only the winning combinations (see FIG. 49) that can be won in each state of RT1 to RT3 are described. The table used for the production operation lottery is not necessarily limited to the one in which the production tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 are prepared as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73. For example, data having the same effect operation probability may be prepared as a common table, and tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 may be prepared only for data having different effect operation probabilities. FIG. 74 is another example of the effect operation lottery table. Explaining with reference to FIG. 74, for example, among the winning combinations shown in the winning combination column of FIG. 49, “maintenance replay”, “up lip 1+normal maintenance lip”, “up lip 2+normal maintenance lip”, “down lip lip” For the winning combinations other than “+normal maintenance rep”, “7 sets of rep +normal maintenance rep” and “7 sets of fake lip +normal rep,” a common production operation lottery table is provided as shown in FIG. 74(a). However, among the winning combinations shown in the winning combination column of FIG. 49, "maintenance replay", "up lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", "up lip 2 + normal maintenance lip", "down lip + normal maintenance lip", " As for “7 sets of lip + normal maintenance lip” and “7 sets of lip lip + normal maintenance lip”, the production operation probabilities corresponding to RT1 to RT3 are set as shown in FIGS. 74(b) to 74(d). A table may be prepared. For example, when the effect tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 are prepared as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, lottery tables for “the number of RT states×the number of winning combinations (condition devices)” are created. Since it becomes necessary, the data capacity becomes enormous, and a large verification period etc. is required, which leads to the extension of the development period.However, there is a problem that the bonus is not established and the replay synthesis probability When there are multiple RT states (RT1 to RT3) that are different from each other, but when there is a winning combination (up lip 1, up lip 2, down lip) that may transition between these RT states Although the operation probability is changed, the production operation probability when a winning combination (rare small role such as cherry or watermelon) that is not a winning combination that transitions between multiple RT states is won does not change, so that the data capacity In other words, for a winning combination (replay combination) whose winning probability changes depending on the RT state, if the production operation probability is not changed depending on the winning probability, replay will occur frequently even if the production operates and it is expected. It is not necessary to prepare lots of lottery tables for winning combinations (bonus combinations (BB1, BB2) and small winning combinations (bell, watermelon, cherry)) whose winning probability does not change depending on the RT state, although an abnormal production state occurs. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, and particularly when the main 409 has to be controlled, the capacity is limited, which is a significant effect.

Specifically, when the RT state is RT1, when the maintenance replay or the “uplift rep 1+normal maintenance rep” is won in the internal lottery, the effect is performed with a probability of approximately ½. Since the normal gaming state before the ART game starts (the gaming state before the winning combination of the ART first win lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the rising lip 1 is displayed on the activated line) is also RT1, in such a gaming state The production will be performed with a probability of approximately one half. On the other hand, when the RT state is RT2 or RT3, the effect is produced only with an extremely low probability as compared with RT1. Hereinafter, RT1 is referred to as a low-lip state in which the replay synthesis probability is relatively low, and RT2 and RT3 are referred to as high-rep states in which the replay synthesis probability is relatively high.

When the low-lip state and the high-lip state are compared with each other, the high-lip state has a higher replay synthesis probability, but the high-lip state is in a state in which effects are more difficult to perform than the low-rep state. When the production is performed, the player expects that he or she may have won a rare small role (watermelon, cherry) that can expect bonuses (BB1, BB2) and ART first win. However, if the performance is frequently performed in the high-rip state, not only the player may not have such expectations when the performance is performed, but also the performance itself becomes troublesome. There is a risk. Therefore, in this example, in the high-lip state, the effect is less likely to be performed than in the low-lip state, so that it is possible to appropriately give the player a sense of expectation when the effect is performed. In addition, such a game property gives the player a right to select whether the RT state after the ART game is finished is controlled to the high-rep state or the low-rep state. It can be said that it is a game. Therefore, the RT state after the end of the ART game is RT1 that is difficult to win for a specific winning combination (replay in this example) but has a high production operation probability, and the RT state after the ART game is easy to win for a specific winning combination (replay in this example) but has a production operating probability. It becomes possible for the player himself to select in which state, RT2 or RT3 having a low value, the game is to be played. Even in such a case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in an ART game, which tends to be monotonous and simply consumes the game. Although it is preferable for a player who wants to select an RT state after the end of the ART game, which is capable of producing an effect at a high frequency, to prevent the transition to the RT1 until the last game of the ART game is reached. Since it is possible to switch to RT1 at an early point, it is possible to have fun at which point in time to switch to RT1. As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the RT2 or the RT3 is changed to the RT1 during the ART game, the addition game number determination lottery is performed and the progress of the ART game or the like is not stopped. Even if the digestion is continued, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest because the production with high expectation is performed with high frequency in the RT state after the ART game ends.

In each of FIGS. 57 to 65, 63 to 65, 69, and 71 to 74, as shown in FIG. 49, a special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) is performed. ) And normal role (normal watermelon role, normal cherry role, normal maintenance replay role) are not shown separately. This is only when the hell is in effect when the special part is selected in the internal lottery, and when the game number management flag is set to ON, the internal lottery is selected. Even if a special character is selected in, the function as a special character cannot be exerted. That is, when the number of games management flag is set to ON and the lottery is performed using one of the tables in FIGS. 57 to 65, 63 to 65, 69 and 71 to 74, The lottery will be conducted without distinguishing between the special role and the normal role. For example, referring to the table of FIG. 62 used in the ART first win lottery performed during the game number management process and not in the ART game, a special watermelon and a normal role as a single role in the internal lottery will be described. Regardless of which watermelon (see FIG. 49) is selected, the ART initial win lottery is performed with reference to the watermelon as a single role shown in the table of FIG.

As described above, by performing the processing of each step shown in FIG. 54, the processing relating to the generation of the instruction function by the main board 409 (step S61 in FIG. 53) is performed, and based on the result of the processing, the processing shown in FIG. The processing after step S62 of the processing relating to the generation of the indicated instruction function is performed.

[10-3-6. Indication function display processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main board 409 determines to generate the instructing function as a result of the instruction function generating process (specifically, for example, at the time of winning the push order small win in the ART game). The instruction content based on the winning combination of the game is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display (instruction function display process). In the instruction function display process, the main board 409 selects the display mode of the instruction function display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from among a plurality of display modes prepared in advance (for example, the display data is held in the ROM 1112 or the like). .. Hereinafter, the instruction function display displayed using the special display LED 612 will be described in detail.

First, an example of the indication function display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, the slot machine 1 is provided with two 7-segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) arranged side by side, and using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, two-digit characters or numbers are displayed. The indication function is displayed by displaying.

75 and 76 are views for explaining the indication function display. 75 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612a, and FIG. 76 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612b. 75 and 76, the "segment display" column shows the alphanumeric characters displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the "content" column shows the contents of the displayed alphanumeric characters. Further, in FIG. 76, a display outline of the effect display (navigation display) on the image display body 500 and the like when the corresponding instruction function display is performed is shown in the “navigation display” column, and the “usage purpose” column is concerned. The situations and situations where the display is used are shown. The navigation display controlled by the sub-board 510 will be described later.

In the instruction function display of this example, the following rules are provided as an example of rules regarding the instruction function display.
(1) Two 7-segment LEDs (7-segment) are used to perform indication function display (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). The special display LED 612a displays information indicating the guide of the pushing place, and the special display LED 612b displays information indicating the pushing order.
(2) During the period in which the instruction function display is performed, the instruction function display is started at least by the time the acceptance of the pressing operation (reel stop operation) for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started, and the last reel 301 that is rotating. The display on the special display LED 612 is switched from the instruction function display to the payout number display at the timing when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the reel stop operation. That is, the period for displaying the instruction function and the period for displaying the number of payouts do not overlap. As a result of the game, if the game value (medal) is not paid out, that is, if the payout number is “0”, the payout number display may not be performed. As a supplementary requirement, if the indication function is displayed and the payout number is not displayed, the indication function display is canceled (not displayed) at the same timing as when the payout number is displayed. As an alternative, the instruction function display may be continued until the payout process is completed.
(3) When one of the reels 301a to 301c that is rotating is first stopped in the game in which the special display LED 612 is used to display the designated function, the stopped reel displays the designated function ( If it is not the reel indicated as the first reel to be stopped by the special display LED 612b (that is, the reel different from the instruction content is first stopped), or the timing of pressing the reel stop button 211 is the instruction function display. Even if the timing does not correspond to the position indicated as the guide of the pushing place by the (special display LED 612a) (that is, the reel stop operation is performed at a position different from the instruction content), The display mode on the special display LED 612 is not changed until the stop operation for the reel 301 is completed.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated, the main board 409 determines which instruction content is displayed on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b as the instruction function display in the game. It will be decided based on the winning combination. First, the instruction contents that can be determined by the main board 409 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.

The main board 409 arbitrarily determines the instruction content of the “reference of the pressing location” displayed on the special display LED 612a within a range that does not deny the “appropriate pressing location” based on the winning combination of the game. be able to. Specifically, for example, when “BB1 (7 red symbols)” is selected as a winning combination, the main board 409 displays “2” on the special display LED 612a.
You may decide the instruction contents to display (red 7 pattern), but in addition to that, since the game method aiming at "red 7 pattern" is not denied, "0" (no designation) is displayed You may decide the instruction content to be made to do.

Further, the main board 409, in the same manner as the instruction content of the “pushing place guide”, regarding the “pushing order” instruction content displayed on the special display LED 612b, “appropriate pressing order” based on the winning combination of the game. The instruction content can be arbitrarily determined within the range that does not deny. For example, it is assumed that "push order bell 1" in which the normal push is "appropriate press order" causes the instruction function in the game selected as the winning combination. At this time, the main board 409 can determine the instruction content of the “push order” to be “left/middle/right” (six selection push order), and according to the display example of FIG. 76 (details will be described later). , "1" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Further, as the instruction content for clarifying only the "left" of the first stop without revealing the second stop and the third stop, "left first (2 options)" may be used as the instruction content. According to the display example of 76 (details will be described later), “A” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Further, from the condition that the range of "appropriate pressing order" is not denied, the instruction content of the pressing order may include at least the game procedure based on "appropriate pressing order". That is, as the instruction content having the possibility that the left reel 301a may be stopped first, “left first or right first” (segment display “E” in FIG. 76) and “left first or middle first” (FIG. The segment display “F” of 76) may be used as the instruction content, and further, the instruction content that makes the pressing order unknown (the segment display “0” of FIG. 76) may be used.

Next, the display examples shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 will be specifically described. First, referring to FIG. 75, as a guide for the pushing place, there are four ways of “0 (no designation)”, “1 (chance symbol)”, “2 (red 7 symbol)”, and “3 (BAR symbol)”. Numbers are set to be displayed. When "0" is displayed as a guide for the pressing place, it means that the guide for the pressing order is not specified, that is, the operation at a specific stop timing is not instructed in the game, but in such a case Even if there is, when the reel stop button 211 is pressed down without being aware of the stop timing (unspecified stop operation), the symbol combination based on some winning combination is not always aligned on the activated line. In other words, if you want to surely stop the symbol combination based on the winning combination in the game in which "No designation" is selected, the predetermined stop timing that can prevent the winning combination from being missed like the maximum efficiency batting method described above. It is required to stop at. Specifically, for example, when "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is won during ART, "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, but the push order bell is a proper push button. As long as it is a stop operation in order, it is possible to arrange the symbol combination of the bell role regardless of the stop timing (without omission). On the other hand, for example, if the special display LED 612a displays “0” when the winning combination is a combination (eg, watermelon combination) that may be missed depending on the stop timing, the stop timing is not considered. If you press the reel stop button 211, you may miss the role of watermelon, and in order to win the role of watermelon surely, when the symbols that make up the symbol combination of the role of watermelon are within the retractable range. It is necessary to press the reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing.

Here, it is preferable that the design which is a guide for the pushing place is a design which is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize while the reel 301 is rotating, but the stop operation is aimed at the design which is the guide at an appropriate timing. Even if it is done, it is not always necessary to stop the symbol on the activated line.

Further, for the symbols corresponding to "1" to "3" shown in FIG. 75, the corresponding symbols may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the target "chance symbol" in "1" may be a "correct" symbol or a "right" symbol, or may be applied to other symbols. Further, the target symbol of "2" may be the "blue 7" symbol instead of the red 7 symbol. The segment display shown in FIG. 75 is merely an example, and the segment display pattern can be increased or decreased and set within a range that can be displayed by the special display LED 612a. For example, a segment display may be added for symbols other than those illustrated in FIG. 75 (for example, watermelon symbols). Further, the pattern set as a guide for the pushing place is not limited to one, and for example, the segment display such as "either the red 7 design or the blue 7 design" is set as a guide for the pushing place is set. May be. 75 and 76, the correspondence between "content" and "segment display" does not have to be one-to-one, and a plurality of "segment display" showing the same "content" are prepared. May be.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, 16 display patterns are set and displayed, and alphanumeric characters “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” are assigned as the display contents of the segment display. .. The contents of each display pattern will be described in detail below. Note that when displayed in 7 segments, capital letters "B" and "D" may be indistinguishable from the numbers "8" and "0", respectively, so in FIG. 76, "b" and "d". Will be displayed in lower case.

The display "0" on the special display LED 612b is used when the pressing order is not limited (the pressing order does not matter). However, as described in the "Use" column, it is not used only when the winning combination does not matter in the pressing order, but when the winning combination that can be won by the alternative is taught, the pushing order is intentionally taught. It can also be used if not. In addition to push order bells and replays, wins that do not require push order include low chances (rare roles) such as chances, watermelons and cherries. Therefore, when the instruction function display is performed when the rare combination is won, the display on the special display LED 612b becomes "0", but at this time, the expected display such as "Chance!" and the type display of the rare combination are displayed in the navigation display. It may be performed. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest or teach the player that the game has a high degree of expectation that is different from the normal game. Further, in the latter case where the pushing order is not dared to be taught when the winning combination that can be won by an alternative is selected, an appropriate pushing order is not taught, so the navigation display example is “????”. ..

The indications "1" to "6" on the special display LED 612b are used when the stop order of each of the three reels 301a to 301c is determined as a proper pressing order, and the so-called 6-option pressing order is displayed. You can When the 6 selection push order is displayed on the instruction function display, at least the reel to be stopped first and the reel to be stopped second are taught in the navigation display. Thirdly, the reel to be stopped will be clarified erasably, but it may be intentionally specified.

Further, the displays "7" to "9" on the special display LED 612b are used when it is determined as a proper pressing sequence whether any one of the three reels 301a to 301c should be stopped first. Thus, it is possible to display a so-called three-option push order. When the three selection push order is displayed on the instruction function display, the navigation display teaches the reel to be stopped first.

When the pressing order such as “1” to “9” is displayed on the special display LED 612b, the most payout is made when the stop operation is performed according to both the display on the special display LED 612a and the display on the special display LED 612b. In order to provide the player with advantageous game results, such as a push-type bell that wins in a stopped form with a certain number of pieces. As described above, in order to obtain the stop system with the largest payout number, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at an appropriate timing in the case of a winning combination that may be missed.

Further, “providing a game result that is advantageous to the player” described in the preceding paragraph includes “suppressing that the game result that is disadvantageous to the player is provided”. A specific example will be described below. For example, a push order replay is prepared in which different symbol combinations are stopped depending on the push order, and when the push order replay is won, if the stop operation is performed according to the "specific push order", the blue 7 symbol arrangement is stopped. I can do it. This blue 7 symbol set is used as one of the effects for teaching the addition when the push order replay is won during ART and it is internally determined that the number of ART games is to be added, for example. To do. When such a push order replay is won, displaying the "specific push order" as an instruction function when the number of ART games is added leads to the provision of "a game result advantageous to the player". On the other hand, when the number of ART games is not increased even if the push order replay is won, if the instruction function of “specific push order” is displayed, it is assumed that the blue 7 symbol arrangement is stopped by the stop operation according to the instruction. However, since the "game result that is advantageous to the player" that is the addition of the number of ART games is not provided, "the game result that is unfavorable to the player" is provided. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the provision of such “a game result unfavorable to the player”, when the number of ART games is not added at the time of the push-order replay, the “specific push” is performed. It is possible to display the pushing order so as to avoid "order". By playing the game in accordance with the instruction function display as described above, the blue 7 symbol alignment in which the number of ART games is not added does not appear, so that "the player is provided with a disadvantageous game result. It is possible to “suppress”, and as a result, “an advantageous game result is provided to the player”.

On the other hand, unlike the case where "1" to "9" are displayed, the display "A" to "F" on the special display LED 612b indicates "a part" of the pressing order that may lead to a game result advantageous to the player. Used when displaying. For example, the display "A" indicates only that the left reel 301a should be stopped first, and does not indicate which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped second. The player must select (two alternatives) the reel to be stopped second. Further, for example, in the case of the display "d", it is indicated that the left reel 301a should not be stopped first, and neither the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Then, even if the proper pressing order (for example, the middle reel 301b) is selected in the first stop, any one of the remaining two reels 301 (in this case, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c) that is rotating again in the second stop. By selecting whether or not to stop, it is possible to make four choices as a result. In addition, if the proper pressing sequence is satisfied only by the selection at the first stop, it is possible to make two selections.

As described above, when the special display LED 612b displays the pressing order such as "A" to "F", even if the stop operation is performed according to the display content, the pressing order is not always proper. However, when the proper push order can be finally selected, the push order bell is won in the stop form with the largest number of payouts, which provides advantageous game results to the player.

The display examples on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b have been described above, but in reality, the two-digit value obtained by combining these is displayed on the special display LED 612 to indicate the instruction content in the game.

Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the instruction function display of the first example is performed, the instruction function display is performed in a display mode in which the instruction content can be easily grasped. Appropriate reel stop operation can be executed while looking at the display LEDs 612a and 612b, and an advantageous game result can be expected as compared with the case where the instruction function display is not performed. In addition, by making it easier for the player to draw attention to the display device that displays such an instruction function, it is possible to create a gaming property that was not available in conventional gaming machines.

Further, the display examples as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 do not necessarily require all the symbols and the pressing order as a guide of the pressing place, and the symbols and the pressing order are appropriately grouped. By adopting such a display example, it can be expected to reduce the amount of data required for the main board 409 to perform the indication function display.

[10-3-7. Instruction generation effect processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 displays the instruction function with the special display LED 612 based on the result of the instruction function generation processing, while displaying the same information as the display content (instruction content) in the instruction function display. By transmitting the instruction information command, the instruction content is notified to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510). Then, the sub-board 510 that has received such an instruction information command displays an instruction generation effect (so-called navigation display) according to the display content of the instruction function display on the image display body 500 or the like (instruction generation effect process).

That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction function is generated, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function, while displaying the navigation display having the same content as the instruction content in the instruction function on the image display body 500. As a result, the content of the instruction is announced in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

Further, as described above in the description of step S31 of FIG. 50, the display mode of the navigation display controlled by the sub-board 510 has a one-to-one relationship with the display mode of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409. The sub-board 501 may determine the display mode for the navigation display from the plurality of display modes as long as the display content does not have to be contrary to the instruction content displayed by the instruction function display (corresponding relationship of 1 to n). ).

As a display example of the navigation display, for example, when "push order bell 2" is selected in the internal lottery, "1" is set at the corresponding position of the left reel 301a, "3" at the corresponding position of the middle reel 301b, and the right reel. By displaying "2" at the corresponding position of 301c, the stop order of the left, right, and middle pinch pushes is taught. In this navigation display, further, based on the content of the instruction information command that the push order bell is won, the display color of the image indicating the stop order is set to yellow, which reminds the bell, or the reel to be stopped next (for example, , When all reels 301 are rotating, it is a reel to be stopped first, and when two reels are rotating, it is equivalent to a reel to be stopped second) than images showing other stop orders. It may be highlighted.

Further, in the navigation display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction content displayed on the image display body 500 may be notified (or assisted) by voice output. Specifically, the reel to be stopped first Is a left reel 301a, an example in which a sound such as "left!" is output at a timing before the first stop of the reel is performed can be given. When performing voice output, different voice output (for example, a non-ART high probability state or a non-ART low probability state) based on the type of winning combination (bell role, replay role, rare role, etc.) or lottery state (for example, Different characters, dialogue, intonation, etc.) can be used properly. By performing the navigation display including the voice output in this way, the notification of the instruction content to the player can be made more reliable, and the navigation display that changes according to the game situation can be provided to enhance the interest of the player. Can be expected to.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function display and the navigation display can be displayed in parallel, so that the instruction content by the instruction function can be more surely transmitted to the player.

FIG. 77 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period by various display devices and the like. In FIG. 77, various display devices and the like are shown on the vertical axis, and a display period such as at which timing in the progress process of one game shown in the horizontal axis the display and transmission are performed is shown. ..

First, each item described on the vertical axis of FIG. 77 will be described. The instruction information 801 corresponds to the instruction information command. When the instruction information 801 is ON, it means “send”, and the instruction information command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510. When the instruction information 801 is OFF, it means “standby”, and the instruction information command is not transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510.

The instruction function 802 corresponds to the instruction function controlled by the main board 409, means “display” when the instruction function 802 is ON, and the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function. When the instruction function 802 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and the special function LED 612 does not display the instruction function.

The payout number 803 corresponds to the number of gaming values paid out as a result of the game, and when the payout number 803 is ON, it means “display”, and the special display LED 612 displays the payout number. When the payout number 803 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and the special display LED 612 does not display the payout number. The information regarding the number of payouts is stored in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and depending on the storage location in the RAM 1114 and the program processing, it can be displayed again even after the power is turned off.

The segment error 804 corresponds to displaying the details (for example, type and content) of the error on the segment LED when the error is detected, and means “display” when the segment error 804 is ON, and the special display LED 612. The details of the error are notified in (error display). When the segment error 804 is OFF, it means "non-display", and the special display LED 612 does not display an error.

The liquid crystal navigation 805 corresponds to the navigation display of the instruction function controlled by the sub-board 510, means “display” when the liquid crystal navigation 805 is ON, and the navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and the navigation display is not performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal navigation 805, navigation display is performed with content that does not violate the display content of the instruction function 802. Although detailed description is omitted, data relating to the display on the sub-board 510 such as the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 is stored in the RAM 1122 of the sub-board 510, and the data can be appropriately read back even when the power is cut off. And

The liquid crystal error 806 is equivalent to displaying the details (for example, type and content) of the error on the liquid crystal display when the error is detected. When the liquid crystal error 806 is ON, it means “display”. Details of the error are notified on the liquid crystal screen of the display body 500. When the liquid crystal error 806 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and details of the error are not notified on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal error 806, the error is notified with the content that does not violate the notification in the segment error 804.

The error occurrence 807 shows the occurrence status of the error, but in the figure, it may be read as the main board 409 detecting the error. When the error occurrence 807 is ON, it means that an error has occurred (the error has been detected) at the timing when it becomes ON, and when the error occurrence 807 is OFF, no error has occurred (the error has been detected). Does not mean). If the error occurrence 807 turns off after turning on, it means that the error has been resolved at the timing of turning off.

The display and transmission from the instruction information 801 to the segment error 804 are managed by the main board 409, and the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and the liquid crystal error 806 is managed by the sub board 510.

Further, in FIG. 77 and other drawings, the “first stop button” is the reel stop button 211 that is the first one of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c corresponding to the spinning reels 301a to 301c. Means that. Similarly, the “second stop button” means the reel stop button 211 on which the reel 301 has been stopped second, and the “third stop button” is the third (or last) reel 301. Means the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed.

Next, a display period (including a transmission period and the like) of each display device shown in FIG. 77 will be described. The timing chart of FIG. 77 is shown under the situation where the game is played without an error occurring during the AT in which the instruction function is executed, and the payout is not generated in the game.

In FIG. 77, according to the instruction information 801, the instruction information command is transmitted when the start lever 210 is pressed. Further, according to the instruction function 802, the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 ends the stop operation for all reels 301 from the timing when the operation for pressing the reel stop button 211 can be accepted (the third stop button is pressed). Is displayed. Further, according to the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display is started from the start of rotation of the reel 301, and the display end timing is the same as the instruction function display. In the example of FIG. 77, the navigation display starts before the instruction function display starts, but the navigation display is displayed based on the content of the instruction information command, and the content of the instruction information command is Since it is the same as the instruction content in the function display, the navigation display is performed with the same content as the instruction function display. However, the display order is not necessarily limited to this.

Further, in the timing chart of FIG. 77, the timing of “starting stop button press acceptance” and the timing at which the instruction function 802 is turned ON appear to be the same, but strictly speaking, after starting press acceptance of the reel stop button 211. The display of the instruction function is not started by the special display LED 612. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “display” of the instruction function 802 is performed before the timing of “starting the stop button press acceptance”, and in the processing of the program by the CPU 1118 of the main board 409. Also, the instruction function display is executed before the timing when the stop button press acceptance starts. The timings of such "start of stop button press acceptance" and "instruction function display" are the same in the timing charts shown in other examples.

Further, in FIG. 77, the start timing of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is the timing when the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted, and the start timing of the navigation display on the image display body 500 is the start time of the rotation of the reel 301. However, these are examples of the display timing. That is, in the slot machine 1, the above-mentioned display (instruction function display and display navigation) is performed at any timing in the period from when the pressing operation of the starting lever 210 is performed until when the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted. May be started.

Next, an example of a display period in a situation different from that of FIG. 77 will be described. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing another example of the display period by various display devices and the like. The timing chart of FIG. 90 is the same as that of FIG. 77 in that the game is played without an error during AT in which the instruction function is executed, but it shows the situation in which payout is generated in the game. Different. In FIG. 90, in addition to the game progress shown on the horizontal axis of FIG. 77, after the reels are completely stopped, the payout of gaming value (medals) is started, and the payout is completed. ", and "medal insertion (BET allowed)" for starting the next game are added.

According to FIG. 90, when the gaming value is paid out, the payout number is displayed on the special display LED 612, and the display is also the same as that displayed on the special display LED 612 until “the third stop button is pressed”. It can be seen that the display period does not overlap with the display. Further, in FIG. 90, the period during which the instruction function 802 is displayed is up to “pressing the third stop button”, but as another example, it may be continuously displayed until “payout start”. Even in such a case, the display period of the instruction function 802 does not overlap with the display period of the payout number 803.
So far

[10-4. Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process ends, an operation for stopping the reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (a stop operation, that is, an operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is awaited. In FIG. 77, as an example, the content of the reel stop processing by the “table method” is shown. The flow of the reel stop control process will be described below.

In the reel stop processing, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected according to the condition device that has operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery in the game. This reel stop control table is prepared in advance with a pattern corresponding to all the condition devices on a one-to-one basis, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409 as read-only table data.

When the reel stop control table is selected based on the condition device established in step S201, the standby state is entered until the pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, whether or not each reel of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c has already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F=0, that is, OFF). It is also determined whether or not any of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until the pressing operation of all reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processing in step S202 and subsequent steps is repeated.

Here, the order in which the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (stop operation procedure) is, as described above, “forward pressing”, “pinching pressing”, “middle forward pressing”, “middle reverse”. Although there are six types of "push", "reverse pinch push", and "reverse push", in the following description with reference to FIG. Pay attention to and classify in three different pressing orders. That is, when the first stop reel is the left reel 301a, it is called "forward push", when it is the middle reel 301b, it is called "middle push", and when it is the right reel 301c, it is called "reverse push".

In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has stopped (left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF=0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. To do. In step S201, if the left reel stop button 211a is first (first) pressed from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c along the "forward-press" stop operation procedure, step S202 Is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F=0). The "first reel" referred to here is a reel that first receives a stop operation or that stops first. In this example (“forward pressing”), the first reel stop flag is in the OFF state (F=0) because the stop operation of the left reel 301a is firstly accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the subsequent Step S204.

In the next step S204, the first reel stop processing is performed on the left reel 301a. In the first reel stop processing, control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

In step S206, a reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, since the effective line of the slot machine 1 is only two lines of the upward right line and the downward right line, at this time, the number of stop control tables for the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) is reduced to one. You can decide. That is, the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (referred to as stop eyes, hereinafter the same) can be a winning symbol especially at the upper position or the lower position. If there is a certain symbol, select a reel stop control table that can align the corresponding winning symbol of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) on the effective line with the symbol as a reference. It will be.

In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F=1), and the process proceeds to the next step S208.

Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is turned ON (LF=1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Then, in step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are in the stopped state. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF is only turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

Then, when the processing of step S202 and subsequent steps is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, so the determination of step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

In step S210, it is determined whether the flag (middle reel stop flag MF) indicating that the middle reel 301b is stopped is OFF (MF=0) and the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. To do. Here, since the "forward push" stop operation procedure is followed, the press operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the subsequent Step S211.

In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F=0) as in step S203. Since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F=1) at this point, this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

In step S213, as a medium reel stop process, control of the stop position of the corresponding winning symbol based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above) To execute. At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second stop reel (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216 to turn on the middle reel stop flag MF.
(MF=1) and the process moves to step S209.

Then, in step S209 again, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are merely in the stopped state, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in the stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Since this is not the case, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202, and the subsequent processing is repeated again.

Further, in the processing from step S202 onward for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF=0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, the subsequent processing of steps S218, S220 and the like is the same as the above-described processing of step S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211, S213), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is turned ON (MF=1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Finally, in step S209, all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in the stopped state at this time point, so this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop processing ends.

It should be noted that the description similar to the above can be applied to the case of the "middle press" stop operation procedure, and thus the details are omitted. However, in the case of the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, there are some differences from the above description, and therefore the following description will be made.

The "reverse push" stop operation procedure differs from the "forward push" or "middle press" stop operation procedure described above in step S221 (determination of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop processing). is there. That is, in the stop operation procedure of "reverse push", only the right reel 301c is in a stopped state, and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stopped eyes of the right reel 301c, there are still two valid symbols. It is possible to align the winning symbol corresponding to any of the lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning symbol can be prepared on any of the activated lines, and any one of them may be selected.

[10-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the reel stop processing described above, reel stop control for pulling the winning symbol corresponding to the establishment flag (corresponding winning symbol) into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible is performed (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, when the reel stop operation by the player is accepted, the range in which it can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (the range in which the winning symbol can be drawn, for example, 4 symbols) (Minutes) is determined in advance, and if there is a corresponding winning symbol in the range, control is performed to pull this into the symbol display window 401 and stop the reel. The "retractable range" here means the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel after the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. Say. For example, if the maximum retractable range is four symbols, when the stop operation of the reel is accepted, the reel can be further rotationally moved up to four symbols based on the position.

Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even when there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is accepted, the corresponding winning symbol is within the retractable range. If there is, it is possible to move the corresponding winning symbol to the inside of the symbol display window 401 and then stop it. By performing this pull-in control, the player displays the winning symbol as long as the winning symbol is within the pull-in range, even if the timing of pushing the relevant winning symbol is somewhat early. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible (missing the game privilege without being able to obtain the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination without being able to arrange the winning symbol).

In the slot machine 1, when the condition device corresponding to the replay combination or the common bell that does not matter the pressing order is operating, the winning symbol can be surely aligned without requiring the player's eyes. This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to each of the replay combination, the bell combination, etc., the corresponding respective winning combination symbols are arranged at a maximum of every four symbols (the above-mentioned figure. 46). In the reel pull-in control, when the maximum pull-in number is set to 4 (4 frames), the symbols arranged at intervals of a maximum of 4 as described above are always effective regardless of the push timing (push position). It becomes possible to pull in the line.

Specifically, for example, when the replay symbols are arranged in the middle row when a predetermined replay combination is won, when paying attention to the replay symbols, other symbols are the maximum between the replay symbols on the left reel 301a. Four of them are arranged (see FIG. 46). As a result, in the left reel 301a, no matter which position on the reel the stop operation is received, the replay symbol is always pulled in and stopped on one of the activated lines as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay combination is operating. be able to.

Further, when the result of the internal lottery is a combination of a bonus combination and a small combination, the small combination is preferentially drawn in rather than the bonus symbol. When a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination is won, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in the winning game, the state of establishment of the bonus combination is maintained after the next game, and the next game In the subsequent games in which a small combination (or a replay combination) has not been established, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

The above is an example of the reel stop processing based on the table method. Aside from this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this as well, a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Further, in the present embodiment, either reel control processing of the control method or the table method may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be appropriately determined when constructing the control program.

[10-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop process ends, the main board 409 has the winning symbols on any of the activated lines in the symbol display window 401 (the combination mode of symbols corresponding to any winning symbol is displayed. Whether or not) is determined. In FIG. 79, the content of this determination process will be specifically described.

When all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped by the reel stop processing, the winning symbols are arranged on any of the activated lines from the mode of the stopped eyes in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning symbol). Whether or not the combination mode of the symbols to be displayed is displayed) is determined. In addition, a stop eye when all reels 301 are stopped is called a stop eye.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not a bonus game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state and OFF state of a predetermined game state flag (for example, a bonus game flag). If the bonus game flag is ON, the determination at step S301 is satisfied, and thus the process proceeds to step S302. If the bonus game flag is OFF, the determination at step S301 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S312.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is a bonus symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination). Explaining the determination of the symbol combination with a specific example, if the bonus is BB1 shown in FIG. 49 and the like, the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is a symbol arrangement of “red 7” on the activated line, and either When such a symbol arrangement is stopped on the diagonal line, it can be determined that the two kinds of BB symbols (bonus symbols) are stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbols has stopped on the activated line (YES in step S302), a bonus game start process regarding the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the process ends. To do. The bonus game start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not the bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is a replay symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination), and if it is determined to be a replay symbol, the replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay game. After the process of step S305, the replay winning flag is turned off (step S306), and the process ends.

When it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not the replay symbol (NO in step S304), as the next determination process, the symbol combination is a small symbol symbol (a symbol combination indicating a winning of a small symbol symbol). ) Is determined (step S308). When it is determined in step S308 that it is a small winning symbol, as a process of step S309, the payout of the specified number of medals according to the aligned small winning symbols is executed (the specified number of medals is paid from the medal discharging device 110). put out). Then, the payout number of medals is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). As a result, the player is notified (announced, displayed) that the specified number of medals corresponding to the small winning combination has been paid out. After the processing in step S309 is completed, the corresponding small winning combination winning flag is turned off (step S310), and the processing is completed.

When it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not a small winning symbol (NO in step S308), none of the determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 described above are satisfied, and any on the activated line. The winning symbols of "No" are not available. In addition, the result at this time is also referred to as a “missing eye (a combination mode of disjointed symbols)”. In such a case, the losing process is executed (step S311). In the losing process, if the winning flag that is in the ON state at this point is any other winning flag except the bonus, the winning flag is turned OFF. Further, if none of the winning flags is ON (at this time, the losing flag is ON), the losing flag is turned OFF. After the losing process in step S311, the determining process ends.

The processes from step S302 to step S311 are processes to be executed when the general state or the bonus internal state is controlled. Next, the processing after step S312 performed when the determination in step S301 is not satisfied will be described. The process here is a process executed during a bonus game (BB game) controlled in a bonus state.

In step S312, it is determined whether or not the bonus game payout symbols are aligned on the activated line. The "bonus game payout symbol" here is a generic term of symbol combinations in which medals are paid out by aligning during the bonus game, and specifically, a bonus game payout combination (in this example, In the state or the internal state, the payout is defined as the same as the small winning combination, but a special bonus exclusive winning combination may be prepared). When an affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a payout process of a specified number of medals according to the aligned bonus game payout symbols is executed (step S313). In the medal payout process, the specified number of medals are paid out from the medal ejection device 110, and the number of medals paid out is displayed on the payout number display LED 612. Through such medal payout processing, the player is notified (announced, displayed) that the specified number of medals corresponding to the bonus game payout combination has been paid out.

Subsequent to step S313, in step S314, bonus game end determination processing for determining whether or not to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 81), and then the determination processing ends.

When it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbol is not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is turned OFF (step S315), and the process is ended. As a pattern that becomes NO in step S312, there may be a case where the bonus game payout combination has been won but has been eliminated, and a case where the bonus game payout combination has not been won. In the process of step S315, the establishment flag of the bonus game payout combination is turned off in the former case, and the loss flag is turned off in the latter case. In addition, in the case where a bonus exclusive winning combination that is surely won during the bonus game is prepared, and when the bonus exclusive winning combination can be won without losing the bonus exclusive winning combination, the processing of step S315 is performed. It may be omitted.

The above-described processing of steps S301 to S315 is the game state determination processing performed by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110). After that, the ART game determination processing is performed in step S320.

Since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the ART function as described above, the determination process (ART game determination process) regarding the continuation, the end, and the number management of the ART game is performed for each game. There is a need to do. The ART game determination process corresponds to a performance process that affects the generation of an instruction, and is therefore executed by the main board 409.

The timing of the ART game determination process may be any appropriate timing of the determination processes shown in FIG. 79, but here, as an example, the processing of steps S306, S310, S311, S314, and S315 is performed. Later, it is assumed that the ART game determination process of step S320 is performed. Details of the ART game determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[10-5-1. Bonus game start processing]
If the determination in step S302 in FIG. 79 is satisfied, the bonus game start process is executed. This bonus game start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether a bonus flag (for example, a BB flag) is ON. When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the bonus game flag is turned on and the bonus flag is turned off. Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the bonus game is cleared. As a result, the cumulative payout number is accumulated from the next game. Then, from the next game, the bonus game is started with the bet number of the prescribed number of the bonus game (the prescribed number of the BB game is 2 in this example).

If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the bonus symbols are aligned even though the bonus flag is OFF. That is, it may occur when some improper means (for example, goto action) is performed or the slot machine 1 is out of order. Therefore, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and the above-mentioned LED or the like is displayed to notify the occurrence of the error.

[10-5-2. Bonus game end determination processing]
Next, the bonus game end determination processing in step S314 of FIG. 79 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 81.

First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S313 of FIG. 79, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the bonus game.

Next, in step S452, it is determined whether or not the cumulative payout number exceeds the total payout number (for example, 200) defined for each bonus. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454, and the cumulative payout number during the bonus game is displayed (displayed on the payout amount display LED 612 and the like. The cumulative payout number is provided separately by an LED or the like for display. It may be displayed on this).

On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game flag is turned off (step S460), and the process ends.

[10-5-3. ART game determination processing]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of ART game determination processing. As described above in [10-3-3] and the like, the ART game is a game that is executed based on winning the ART in the ART lottery, and when the ART game is being executed, the push order small win ( When the winning combination of "push order bell" is won, the instruction information such as "appropriate push order" is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), and the teaching effect (navi display) according to the instruction function display is displayed. It is displayed on the image display body 500 and the like. The ART game determination process is a determination process regarding the start, continuation, end, and the like of such an ART game, and is executed by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110) that is the control body of the ART. An example of the ART game determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, the outline of the ART game will be described. The ART game is started when the start condition of the ART game is satisfied, and is continuously executed in the subsequent game period until the end condition of the ART game is satisfied. [10-3-3] As described in the instruction function processing below, when the start condition of the ART game is satisfied, a predetermined internal flag (ART flag) is turned on to start the ART game, At the end of the ART game, the ART flag is turned off. Information such as an internal flag relating to the ART game such as the ART flag and the number of ART games described later is held in a memory (for example, RAM 1114) in the main board 409 which controls the ART game, but in the sub-board 510. Similar information may be held in a memory (eg, RAM 1122).

The conditions for starting the ART game (conditions for turning on the ART flag) are as described in detail in [10-3-2] and below, but in a nutshell, winning the ART in the ART first win lottery That is.

In step S501 of FIG. 82, as the first process of the ART game determination process, the current ART flag is compared with the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game to determine whether or not the ART flag is ON. That is, in step S501, it is determined whether the ART flag is turned from OFF to ON from the previous game to the current game. It is assumed that the value of the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game is stored separately. If it is determined that the ART flag has been turned ON (YES in step S501), the number of ART games at the start of ART is set (step S502), and the process ends. The number of ART games at the start of ART (so-called initial number of games) may be set to a fixed number of games in advance, the number of games may be drawn at the time of winning the ART, or determined by another method. However, here, as an example, it is assumed that the initial number of games determined by the above-described instruction function processing is set as the number of ART games at the start of ART.

The ART game is started from the next game by performing the process of step S502. At the start of the ART game, the start of the ART game and the effect of clearly indicating the number of ART games to the player are performed (for example, display of the ART start screen).

On the other hand, if it is not determined that the ART flag is turned ON in step S501, that is, if the ART flag is OFF or the ART flag is ON from the previous game (NO in step S501), the ART flag is It is determined whether or not it is ON (step S505), and if the ART flag is ON (YES in step S505), it is determined whether or not it is in the specialized zone (step S506). Here, if it is determined that the ART flag is ON and that it is not in the specialized zone (YES in step S505 and NO in step S506), it means that one game in the ART game has been played. Is subtracted from the value of the number of ART games by "1" (step S507). If it is determined in step S506 that the zone is in the specialized zone (YES in step S506), the number of ART games is not subtracted, so step S507 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S508. If it is determined in step S505 that the ART flag is not ON (NO in step S505), since the ART game is not in progress, the process ends.

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the number of games at the start determined at the start of the ART game, the addition function of adding the number of ART games based on satisfying a predetermined condition during the ART game. Is assumed to have. When the number of ART games is added, a predetermined internal flag (addition flag) is turned on, and the number of ART games to be added (number of additional games) is determined. The condition for determining the addition is not particularly limited, and may be the winning of a specific winning combination in the role lottery, or may be determined based on some other lottery result. Also, the method of determining the number of games to be added is not limited to a particular method. Then, the processes of steps S508 to S510 described below are processes that are performed when the function of adding the number of ART games is added.

First, in step S508, it is determined whether or not the addition flag is ON. If the addition flag is ON (YES in step S508), a process of adding the addition game number to the current ART game number is performed (step S509), and the addition flag is turned off (step S510). As a result, the number of remaining ART games is increased by the additional amount, and the duration of the ART game, which is advantageous to the player, is extended.

After the processing of step S510 (after the processing of step S506 if the addition function is not provided), it is determined whether or not the current number of ART games is "0" (step S511), and if it is "0" Since the condition for ending the ART game is satisfied, the ART flag is turned off (step S512), and the process ends. At this time, not only is the player clearly notified of the end of the ART game, but also information about a series of ART games (for example, the total number of payout medals in the ART game and the number of continued ART games) is clearly displayed to the player. You can

If it is determined in step S511 that the current number of ART games is not "0" (NO in step S511), the ending condition of the ART game is not satisfied, and therefore the process is ended without changing the ART flag. As a result, the ART game is continued in the subsequent games.

The ART game determination process described with reference to FIG. 82 is an example of a process in which the game period controlled to the game state for the ART game (ART game period) is a method in which 1 count is subtracted for each game. If the ART game period is managed by another subtraction method (for example, the ART game period is determined by the number of appearances of ART navigation), it is desirable to perform an appropriate ART game determination process according to the subtraction method. .

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an internal flag indicating the start of an ART game (for example, an ART start flag) may be prepared separately from the ART flag for the ART game determination processing. The ART start flag is an internal flag that is turned ON when the ART first win lottery is won and the ART game start condition is satisfied. In such a case, in a series of processes by the ART game determination process, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the ART start flag is ON. If the ART start flag is ON, in step S502, the ART initial game is started. After setting the number, a process of turning on the ART flag and turning off the ART start flag may be performed. If the ART start flag is OFF in step S501, the process of step S505 and subsequent steps is performed. You can do this.

[10-6. Control of production operation]
The above is an example of the control mainly by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, the control of various effect operations is executed by the sub-board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the sub-board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118 or the like) based on various commands (information command, output signal) output from the main board 409. As described above, the various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such an effect mode is stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

For example, the presentation mode includes one that is completed only in the game (hereinafter, referred to as a one-shot production mode), one that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter, referred to as a continuous production mode), and the like. Of these, in the single-shot production mode, a production that suggests the winning flag (instruction production, notification production, details will be described later), production that informs payout of medals (payment appearance, it is also possible to inform the number of payouts) There is.

The suggestive effect is an effect that indirectly notifies the player of the winning flag (notification effect), which is different from the effect of directly informing the player of the winning flag. For example, a form of a winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. , Such as displaying colors and the like. In addition, the suggestive effect is performed even when there is no winning flag (that is, in the case of losing). In this case, it is an effect whose content is hard to notice that it is lost (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken by any winning combination). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

In the notification effect, for example, when the winning flag is a bonus role or when the player wins in the ART first win lottery, the result regarding the game such as “bonus confirmed!” or “ART winning!” is clearly shown to the player. It is something that can be announced. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination (because a large number of medals may be obtained) that is pleasing to the player, such as a bonus or ART. That is, when the player wins the ART first win or the like, it is possible to give a meaning to congratulate that.

Note that the various presentation modes described above can be executed as the display of an image by the image display body 500, the generation of a sound effect by the speaker 512 or the like, the light emission or lighting by the LED decoration, or the like. Such an effect mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression when the player continues to play the game for a long time. The presentation mode is not limited to being performed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, and the like. For example, instead of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, a doll that imitates a character, a movable model, etc., and side reels (for example, they are placed at positions different from those of the reels, and can be started and stopped independently of the player's operation as part of the production. What is to be executed) or illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light typified by a rotating lamp) may be provided to execute various effects. By adopting such a method, it is possible to fully entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[10-7. Game number management processing]
By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game number management processing for managing the number of games is executed by the game number management control unit of the CPU 1110. The game number management control means of the CPU 1110 starts the game number management process (starts the game number counting process) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition, and the game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. By ending the number management process (ending the game number count process), the number of games executed by the player during the game number management process as the specific section is counted and the number of games is managed. When a predetermined ending condition is satisfied and the game number management process ends, the number of games counted in the game number management process is initialized and returns to zero.

The above-mentioned predetermined start condition for starting the game number management processing is to shift from the hell state to another ART lottery state (non-ART lottery state, ART lottery state). That is, when it is determined that the ART game will eventually be executed (for example, the ART game will be executed after the precursor game has ended), or the ART game will not be executed, the winning probability of the ART first win lottery The game number management process is started, for example, when the value is increased.

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined ending condition for ending the game number management process is that the number of games counted during the game number management process is set to a predetermined threshold value (in this example, 1466 games are set as described above). ) Is reached, and the ART lottery state shifts from the non-ART lottery state or the ART lottery state to the hell state. When any one of these two conditions is satisfied in the game number management process, the game number management process ends. Here, the condition for shifting the ART lottery state to the hell state may be arbitrarily set, for example, when the pullback state ends after the ART game ends.

In the present embodiment, when the start condition for starting the game number management process and the condition for ending the game number management process are compared, the start condition for starting the game number management process is significantly It is configured to be high. Therefore, a period during which the game number management flag is set to ON (corresponding to the threshold value of 1466 games in this example) and a period during which the game number management process is set to OFF (in this example, the hell state is controlled The period during which the game number management flag is set to ON is extremely longer than the period during which the game number management flag is set. In the hell state, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is low, but at the time of shifting to another lottery state (non-ART lottery state, ART lottery state), non-ART lottery state (at least non-ART medium low probability) The advantageous game can be executed with a higher probability (30% (see FIG. 67) in the present embodiment) than the state). As a result, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in interest while suppressing gambling.

Further, the CPU 1110 of the present slot machine 1 has an ART game forced termination means, and this ART game forced termination means has a predetermined number of games counted in the game number management process even during the ART game. Upon reaching the threshold, the ART game is immediately and forcibly terminated.

In the game after the ART game is forcibly ended in this way, the ART lottery state is controlled to the no-lottery state. In this non-lottery state, although the ART initial win lottery is non-lottery, the internal lottery such as the BB role is performed. When the ART game is forcibly terminated, the RT state is RT2 or RT3, and the RT lottery state is entered based on the fact that the 0th-bell zero has appeared and the RT1 is entered. Is moved from the no-lottery state to the hell state. As a result, it is possible to prevent accidental occurrence of a situation in which a large number of game media as prizes are given in a short period of time, and it is possible to suppress unnecessarily encouraging gambling. Become.

Further, when the BB is won and the bonus game is executed in the non-lottery state, the ART lottery state in this bonus game is also controlled to be the non-lottery state. Then, the ART lottery state control means shifts the ART lottery state from the no-lottery state to the hell state based on the fact that the RT state has shifted to the general state after the bonus game has ended. However, instead of shifting from the non-lottery state to the hell state based on the bonus game ending and the RT state shifting to the general state, the bonus game is terminated and the RT state shifting to the general state. Further, the non-lottery state may be shifted to the hell state on the basis that the RT state is shifted from the general state to RT1 due to the appearance of 0-bell zero.

[10-8. Overall game flow]
The overall game flow in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a time chart showing an example of the overall flow of the game. In describing the overall game flow, each control state in the slot machine 1 of this example will be summarized and described.

First, in the slot machine 1 of this example, when viewed from the perspective of the RT state, a general state that is controlled after the bonus game is finished, and RT1 and RT1 that are controlled when a zero-bell zero appears, and a replay 1 is raised. RT2, which is controlled when a symbol combination corresponding to “1” appears, or when a symbol combination corresponding to lowered replay appears at RT2, and RT3 which is controlled when a symbol combination corresponding to raised replay 2 appears at RT2, BB1 Either of the bonus internal state controlled when the symbol combinations corresponding to these winning symbols BB2 have not appeared, or the bonus state in which the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 or BB2 appears and the bonus game is being executed. The crab is controlled by the RT state control means.

From the perspective of the ART lottery state, the ART first win lottery probability is a non-lottery state in which the ART first win lottery is unexecuted, or a state that is shifted when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the no lottery state, and the ART first win lottery probability is Either the lowest hell state except the no-lottery state, the non-ART lottery state that is controlled when there is no lottery state, the hell state, or the ART game, and the ART lottery state that is controlled during the ART game And is controlled by the ART lottery state control means. Although not shown in FIG. 83, as described above, there are a non-ART medium low probability state and a non-ART medium high probability state in the non-ART medium lottery state, and an ART medium low probability state in the ART medium lottery state. There is an ART medium-high probability state.

Further, the instruction function control means sets the instruction function flag to either an ON state in which the operation of the instruction function is permitted or an OFF state in which the operation of the instruction function is not permitted. The operation of the instruction function by the instruction function control means is not allowed even if the ART first win lottery is won unless the number of ceiling games is exhausted, and is allowed based on the exhaustion of the number of ceiling games (ON), ART. When the game ends, the allowance is canceled (OFF).

Further, the game number management control means sets the game number management flag to the ON state where the game number management control is performed (the number of games executed by the player is counted), and the game number management control is not performed (game). (The number of games played by a person is not counted.) OFF state is controlled. The game number management control by the game number management control means is not executed (OFF) in the no-lottery state and the hell state, and is performed based on the ART lottery state being shifted to the non-ART lottery state or the ART lottery state. (ON).

Also, from the viewpoint of the game state that can be grasped by the player, a general game state in which the ceiling game number is not set, a precursor game state in which the ceiling game number is set, and an instruction function flag when the ceiling game number is exhausted Is set to ON (state ready for execution of ART game, that is, state in which ART game can be executed when symbol combination corresponding to raised replay 2 appears), symbol combination corresponding to raised replay 2 The player can recognize that the game state is one of the ART state that appears and is in the ART game and the pullback state after the ART game is finished (pullback state).

The instruction function is permitted to operate in the above-described preparation state and ART state, and is not permitted to operate in the normal game state, the precursor game state, and the pullback state.

The game number management control is not executed in the general game state in which the ceiling game is not set, but is started based on the ceiling game being set. When it is determined that the number of games executed by the player exceeds the predetermined threshold during the game number management process (game number management flag ON), the game number management flag is set to OFF.

Next, the overall game flow will be described. When the RT state is R1 and the ART lottery state is the no-lottery state or the hell state (in FIG. 83, the ART lottery state is shown as the hell state), the ceiling game number is not set, so the player The game state viewed from is a general state. At this time, both the instruction function flag and the game number management flag are OFF. Then, the execution of the bonus game is started in the no-lottery state or the hell state, or the special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state and other When the state is shifted to the ART lottery state (the ART lottery state more advantageous than the hell state, the non-ART during lottery state is shown in FIG. 83), the game number management flag is set to ON. As a result, the general game state shifts to the precursor game state.

In the omen game state, the ceiling game number is set and the instruction function flag is set to OFF. Then, when the number of ceiling games is exhausted, the instruction function flag is set to ON, and the game state seen by the player shifts from the precursor game state to the preparation state. Then, when the “up rep 1+normal maintenance rep” is selected in the internal lottery, and the symbol combination corresponding to the up rep 1 is displayed by the player performing the stop operation based on the indication function display, the RT state Is shifted from RT1 to RT2, and the first ART game shown in FIG. 83 is started (entering the ART state). When the ART game is started, the ART lottery state is shifted from the non-ART lottery state to the ART lottery state.

Since the instruction function flag is set to ON during the ART game (during the ART state), even if "lower lip + normal maintenance lip" is selected in the internal lottery, the player is displayed based on the instruction function display. The RT state is maintained at RT2 as long as the stop operation is performed, but when the symbol combination corresponding to the lowering replay is displayed by stopping the operation against the indication function display, the RT state is maintained with the indication function maintained. It will be moved from RT2 to RT1. However, when "up rep 1 + normal maintenance rep" is selected in the internal lottery and the stop operation is performed based on the indication function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the up rep play 1 is displayed and the RT state is displayed. Returns from RT1 to RT2.

Further, even if the instruction function flag is OFF, when “up Lip 1+normal maintenance Lip” is selected in the internal lottery, the symbol combination corresponding to the up Lip 1 is stopped by the player by the stop operation. It may be displayed accidentally. In this case, the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2, but the ART game is not started because the number of ceiling games has not been exhausted. Then, when the 0-th bell zero is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to R1.

Although not shown in FIG. 83, during the non-ART mid-lottery state, one of the non-ART mid-low probability state and the non-ART mid-high probability state is controlled based on the result of the non-ART mid-lottery state transition lottery. During the ART lottery state, one of the ART medium low probability state and the ART medium high probability state is controlled based on the result of the ART medium lottery state transition lottery.

When the first ART game shown in FIG. 83 is finished, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, the ART lottery state is changed from the ART lottery state to the lottery state after the ART game is finished, and the pullback state is set. The RT state is maintained at RT2 as long as the 0th page zero is not displayed, but when the 0th page zero is displayed, the state is shifted from RT2 to RT1.

The withdrawal state ends when the maintenance lottery is lost, and accordingly, the ART lottery state shifts from the lottery state after the ART game ends to the non-ART lottery state. However, when the number of games counted by the number-of-games management control means reaches a threshold value in the pullback state, the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF, and the ART lottery state shifts from the lottery state after the ART game ends to the no-lottery state. To be done.

In this example, the number of games counted by the game number management control means has not reached the threshold value at the time when the first ART game ends, and in FIG. 83, the state when winning the ART first win lottery in the pullback state It is shown. When the ART first win lottery is won in the withdrawn state, the ceiling game of 32 games is set, which is not shown in FIG. 83. When the ceiling game is exhausted, the instruction function flag is set to ON, the ART lottery state is changed to the ART lottery state, and the second ART game shown in FIG. 83 is started. At this time, if the RT state is changed to RT1, the ART game is started when the RT state is changed to RT2, but if the RT state is maintained at RT2, the ceiling game is exhausted and the ART game is started. The game starts. When the second ART game shown in FIG. 83 is finished, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, the ART lottery state is changed from the ART lottery state to the lottery state after the ART game is finished, and the pullback state is set.

In this example, the number of games counted by the number-of-games management control means has not reached the threshold value at the time when the second ART game ends, and in FIG. 83, BB1 is selected by internal lottery in the pullback state. The state when it is played is shown. When BB1 is selected in the internal lottery, the RT state until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is displayed becomes a bonus internal state, and when the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is displayed, it becomes a bonus state and the CPU 1110 has. The bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means.

It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the bonus game is executed, if the player wins the maintenance lottery without winning the ART first win lottery in the withdrawal state, the withdrawal state ends, and the ceiling game is not set and becomes a general game state. , The ART lottery state shifts from the lottery state after the ART game ends to another ART lottery state. In FIG. 83, the figure in which the ART lottery state is changed from the lottery state after the ART game to the non-ART lottery state is shown, but when the game number management flag is set to OFF, the ART lottery state is changed to the no-lottery state. It However, the game number management flag is not set to OFF during execution of the bonus game.

FIG. 83 shows a state where the ceiling game is set by winning the ART first hit lottery during the bonus state (during execution of the bonus game) and the precursor game state is entered. Then, when the bonus game ends, the RT state shifts from the bonus state to the general state (RT0), and when the 0-bell zero pattern is displayed in the general state, the RT state shifts from the general state (RT0) to RT1. To be done.

In FIG. 83, since the number of games counted by the number-of-games management control means has not reached the threshold value at the time when the bonus game is over, the number-of-games management flag is kept ON. Further, in FIG. 83, the omen game state is continuing because the ceiling game is not consumed at the time when the bonus game ends. Then, when the 0-th bell zero is displayed, the RT state is shifted from the general state (RT0) to RT1, and when the ceiling game is exhausted and the instruction function flag is set to ON, the state is shifted to the ready state.

After that, when "raise replay 1 + normal maintenance replay" is selected in the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the rise replay 1 is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2 and is shown in FIG. 83. The third ART game is started, the ART state is entered, and the ART lottery state is changed from the non-ART lottery state to the ART lottery state.

During the third ART game, when the number of games counted during the game number management process (that is, the number of games executed by the player after the game number management flag is set to ON) reaches the threshold, The number management flag is set to OFF, and the game number management process ends. When the number-of-games management process ends, the instruction function flag is set to OFF and the running ART game is forcibly ended. At this time, the ART game is forcibly terminated midway, even if the prescribed number of games has not been exhausted. When the ART game is forcibly ended in this way, the ART lottery state is shifted to the no-lottery state, and the general game state in which the ceiling game is not set is set. However, the game number management flag is not limited to being set to OFF when the number of games counted during the game number management process reaches a threshold value, and the RT lottery state is shifted from the no-lottery state to the hell state. It may be set to OFF at times.

Even if the ART game is forcibly ended, the RT state is maintained at RT2 unless the 0-bell zero is displayed, and the RT-state is set to RT1 based on the 0-bell zero being displayed. Will be migrated. In the slot machine 1 of this example, after the ART game is forcibly ended, while the RT state is controlled to RT2, the ART lottery state is set to the no-lottery state, and the RT state is changed from RT2 to RT1. Based on this, the ART lottery state is changed from the no-lottery state to the hell state.

When the special role is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state and the ART lottery state is changed to another ART lottery state (non-ART lottery state in FIG. 83), the game number management flag is set to ON. Then, the game number management process is started. When the special role is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state, the transition destination determination lottery in step S632 is performed and the ceiling game is set without fail, so that the general game state changes to the precursor game state.

In addition, in FIG. 83, the mode in which the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT3 is not shown, but the special zone lottery is won (YES in step S606), and the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 2 is on the activated line. Is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT3, and the special zone state is set.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game number management flag is set to ON by comparing the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON and the period in which the game number management flag is set to OFF. The period is set to be higher. Then, in the hell state where the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF, although the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is low, transfer to another lottery state (non-ART lottery state, ART lottery state) At times, the advantageous game can be executed with a higher probability (30% in the present embodiment) than in other lottery states (at least non-ART medium/low probability state). Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to preferably suppress the decrease in interest while suppressing gambling.

[10-7. Processing when an abnormal condition occurs]
The processing performed when an abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail.

In the slot machine 1, when an abnormal state occurs during a game, an error is notified according to the detected error type. In particular, in the case of an error that can be detected by the main board 409, the error lamp 604 is turned on (or blinks), and the special display LED 612 can display an error indicating the type of the error. Note that the special display LED 612 normally displays an instruction function display and a payout number display. In some cases, no error is detected, but a sudden power failure is included in the abnormal state.

When the above-described abnormal state occurs, it is necessary to cancel the error in order to return to the normal game state (in the case of power off, it is sufficient that no error display remains after power is returned). The method of releasing the error differs depending on the error that has occurred, but it is often necessary to turn off the power (OFF/ON).

[10-7-1. RAM clear]
Here, the clearing of data values (RAM clear) in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 will be described.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the time of a specific operation such as setting change or power OFF/ON, the value of the data held in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is erased or initialized in an address range corresponding to each operation. A clear process (RAM clear) of rewriting to a value is performed. Therefore, even when the error canceling process is performed, there is a possibility that part of the data held in the RAM 1114 will be cleared if the power is turned off and on.

However, if the error clearing process is performed during the indication function display or the power is cut off during the payout of medals, the RAM clear clears the data used for the indication function display and the payout number display. , It is assumed that the game may be interrupted. In the slot machine 1, the RAM clearing target range in the RAM 1114 is set in advance in view of such a problem.

FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining a data block of RAM. FIG. 84 shows an internal image of the RAM 1114, where the upper end is the beginning of the memory address and the lower end is the end of the memory address. For example, the unused area 1114z is a data area where data is not read or written (in other words, a data area other than the used area), and is collected on the end side of the memory address. As shown in FIG. 84, in the RAM 1114, a plurality of “areas” are predetermined according to the type of data to be stored. In addition, five types of "clear range 0" to "clear range 4" are defined as the RAM clear target range. It should be noted that each clear range may include an unused area 1114z.

First, the clear range of RAM clear will be described. "Clear range 0" basically means a target range that is not executed and corresponds to all erasure. That is, the RAM clearing in the clear range 0 is not performed by normal maintenance or error processing. From another point of view, the set value data area 1114a is not cleared of data values except when the RAM is cleared in the clear range 0. This means that the set value data area 1114a is basically not cleared.

“Clear range 1” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the start of setting change performed by operating the setting key switch 1112t. Specifically, of the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 84, all data areas below the door flag area 1114b are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a is not cleared.

“Clear range 2” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the time of reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 84, the data areas below the lamp ON data area 1114d are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to door monitoring timer area 1114c are not cleared.

“Clear range 3” means a target range in which RAM is cleared at the end of the bonus. The RAM clearing from the clear range 0 to the clear range 2 requires work by a hall clerk or the like as an opportunity to execute each RAM clear, but the RAM clear at the end of the bonus is automatically performed by internal processing after the end of the bonus. Will be executed. In the RAM clear at the end of the bonus, specifically, of the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 84, the data areas equal to or less than the replay input number area 1114j are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the instruction function display area are included. 1114i is not cleared.

The “clear range 3” is also a target range in which the RAM clear is performed when the power is simply turned off/on. That is, when the power is turned off/on without performing setting change or reset operation, the data area that is the target range in “clear range 3” is cleared. Since the instruction function display area 1114i is not included in the "clear range 3", the instruction content of the instruction function is not erased by turning the power off/on.

“Clear range 4” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the start of each game. The RAM clear at the start of each game is automatically executed, for example, by an internal process when the start lever 210 is operated in a state where the bet number of medals is determined. In the RAM clear at the start of each game, specifically, the data area of the display flag area 1114l or less among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 84 is the target, and the set value data area 1114a to the interrupt check are used. The timer area 1114k is not cleared.

Next, each data area shown in FIG. 84 will be briefly described. A set value set in the slot machine 1 is stored in the set value data area 1114a.

Information indicating the open/closed state of the door-shaped front member 200 (or the front opening/closing member 90) is stored in the door flag area 1114b, and the door-shaped front member 200 (or the front opening/closing member 90) is stored in the door monitoring timer area 1114c. Time information for recognizing opening is stored.

The lamp ON data area 1114d stores information regarding lighting of lamps (for example, the replay lamp 606, the start lamp 608, and other display devices arranged on the display panel 501). Information indicating the number of credits (the number of stored medals) is stored in the number-of-credits area 1114e. The credit display area 1114f stores information for displaying the number of stored medals on the stored number display LED 613. The payout number area 1114g stores information indicating the number of payouts (medal payout number) indicating how many gaming values have been paid out in the game. The payout display area 1114h stores information for displaying the number of paid-out medals on the special display LED 612. The instruction function display area 1114i stores information corresponding to the instruction content of the instruction function for displaying the instruction function display on the special display LED 612.

The replay insertion number area 1114j stores the number of game values to be inserted during the replay operation (the number of medals inserted during replay). In the interrupt check timer area 1114k, timer information necessary for executing the interrupt process is stored.

Information indicating an error display state displayed on the special display LED 612 is stored in the display flag area 1114l. In the medal payout number area 1114m, the payout number of gaming value to be paid out as a result of the game is stored. In the insertable number area 1114n, information indicating a state of whether or not a game value can be inserted is stored. In the number-of-medals-insertion area 1114o, the number of game value inserted before the start of the game is stored. The random number storage area 1114p stores random numbers used in the condition device.

In this way, in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, by setting the range in which the RAM clear is performed for each of various actions (when changing the setting, turning the power OFF/ON, etc.), it can be expected to realize efficient memory control.

Note that the RAM 1114 defines a range (capacity) that can be used as a storage area of the main board 409 in the game machine, and data such as programs must be stored within the specified range. However, in recent years, regarding the processing related to the test signal and the processing related to fraud, the data related to the program for the processing is stored in an unused area (for example, the unused area 1114z in FIG. 84) outside the specified range. Is allowed. However, use of such an unused area is limited to a gaming machine having an instruction function.

Further, in the slot machine 1, after the RAM is cleared after the power is turned off, whether or not the data displayed before the RAM is to be redisplayed is determined by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 (or the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510). ) Can be determined for each type of data. That is, the CPU 1110 (or the CPU 1118) may refer to the data stored in the data area where the RAM has not been cleared to redisplay the data as much as possible when the power is restored, or may display the specific data (for example, The data relating to the payout number display, the data relating to the navigation display, etc.) can be theoretically redisplayed, but may not be redisplayed by program control. At this time, referencing the data saved in the stack point of the RAM 1114 is also included.

[10-7-2. error indication]
Next, the error display on the special display LED 612 will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the error display by the special display LED. In the slot machine 1, when an error described in the “Notification type” column of FIG. 85 (which will be described later but includes some that are not errors) is displayed in the “SEG” column on the special display LED 612. By displaying such a predetermined segment, the type of the detected error is notified in a distinguishable manner. Of the errors shown in the “Notification type” column of FIG. 85, each error other than “communication error (during series code error)” detected by the sub-board 510 has a main error detection signal when the error occurs. The board 409 is notified. The errors shown in FIG. 85 are some of the errors that can be detected by the slot machine 1. In addition to the illustrated errors, there are errors that can be detected by the main board 409 or the sub-board 510.

The outline of each error shown in the "Notification type" column of FIG. 85 will be described below.

The “RAM error” is an error notified when the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is broken. On the other hand, “communication error (during series code error)” is detected when there is an error in the series code transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510, but since it is detected by the sub-board 510, a special display No error is displayed on the LED 612.

Although "setting is being changed" or "setting is being confirmed" is not an error, the "setting value" is displayed (notified) on the special display LED 612 during the operation, and thus is described in FIG. The setting value of the slot machine 1 is stored in the setting value data area 1114a of the RAM 1114, for example. Note that the notification timing of “during setting change” is the start of a predetermined setting change operation, and the notification timing of “setting confirmation” is the start of a predetermined setting check operation.

The “illegal payout error” is an error notified when an abnormal payout is made. Specifically, a payout count switch (not shown, which is a switch for counting the number of paid-out medals, for example, except when the medals are paid out from the hopper 110b by the operation of a driving means (not shown) included in the medal discharging device 110, (Provided in the medal releasing device 110) is turned on. In FIG. 85, the notification priority is set differently depending on whether the timing at which the error is detected is "when the main game is not stopped" or "when the main game is stopped". The higher priority is detected when the main game is not stopped. However, the same "HF" is segment-displayed on the special display LED 612 regardless of the timing of detection.

The "inserted medal passing time 1 error", "inserted medal passing time 2 error", "medal passing sequence 1 error", "medal passing sequence 2 error", "medal passing interval time error", and "inserted medal backward error" The error is notified when there is an abnormality in the process of inserting a medal from the medal insertion slot 203 and reaching the hopper 1110b. The abnormality referred to here includes not only an abnormality relating to the passage route of the medal but also an abnormality caused by the insertion of a foreign object other than the medal.

In the slot machine 1, when the insertion sensor 207b detects the passage of a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 (when the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state), the lever sensor, the selector sensor, and the shoot sensor are then detected. It reaches the hopper 110b while the passage is detected at. The lever sensor, the selector sensor, and the shoot sensor are sensors provided in the medal selector 207 and detect passage of medals at predetermined positions where they are provided (not shown). Further, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the path to the insertion sensor 207b is locked out, so that even if the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, the medal is passed through the medal selector 207 and the return gutter 213. It is returned to the sauce pan 201. When the medals whose passage has been detected by the insertion sensor 207b have not moved through such a normal process (prescribed medal passage sequence), the main board 409 determines whether or not each sensor has detected and the detection time. Detect each of the above errors.

The outline of each error is explained. The “insertion medal passage time 1 error” is an error that is notified when medals (including foreign matter other than medals) are accumulated in the vicinity of the insertion sensor 207b. It is detected when it continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). The “inserted medal passing time 2 error” is an error that is notified when medals (including foreign matter other than medals) stay near the lever sensor. Specifically, the medal detection by the lever sensor is a predetermined time. It is detected when it continues (for example, 500 ms). The detection target period of the "inserted medal passage time 2 error" is always set, but the notification timing of the error is set at the start of medal acceptance (or at the end of the game such as after completion of the payout process).

The "medal passing sequence 1 error" is an error that is notified when the medal detection by the lever sensor is not detected (OFF) but the medal detection by the selector sensor is performed. More specifically, the error is detected when the lever sensor has not detected a medal in a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms) before the passage of the medal is detected by the selector sensor. The "medal passing sequence 2 error" is an error that is notified when the medal detection by the shoot sensor is not performed after the medal detection by the selector sensor. More specifically, the error is detected when the shoot sensor does not detect a medal within a predetermined period (for example, 400 ms) after the selector sensor detects that the medal has passed.

The “medal passage interval time error” is an error that is notified when a medal passes in a manner that is not expected under normal circumstances. Specifically, in each sensor provided in the medal selector 207, some object is detected with a passage interval shorter than the shortest medal passage interval (that is, the passage interval when medals are continuously inserted) assumed during normal operation. The error is detected when the situation that the vehicle has passed is detected over a predetermined frequency (for example, five consecutive times).

The “inserted medal backward error” is an error that is notified when a medal moves on a route other than the prescribed medal passing sequence, and particularly when a backward movement is detected. Specifically, it is detected based on the order of detection of medals by each sensor (insertion sensor 207b, lever sensor, selector sensor, shoot sensor, etc.) provided in the medal selector 207.

Further, the “payout medal jam error”, the “payout medal empty error”, and the “auxiliary storage full tank error” are errors reported when there is an abnormality related to the payout or storage of medals. To explain the outline of each error, first, the "payout medal jam error" is an error that is notified when a medal is jammed during the medal payout from the hopper 110b. Specifically, when the payout count switch is in the ON state for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) or more, the error is detected. The "payout medal empty error" is an error that is notified when the medals in the hopper 110b are empty. Specifically, when the medals from the hopper 110b are not normally paid out and the payout is retried (payout retry), if the payout count switch is in the ON state for a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms) or more after the payout retry. If not, the error is detected. The “auxiliary storage full tank error” is an error that is notified when the medal auxiliary storage box 111 is full. Specifically, when the medal full sensor 111a of the medal auxiliary storage box 111 detects the storage of medals exceeding a predetermined standard, the error is detected.

The “priority” column in FIG. 85 shows the priority of notification between errors. In the present example, the priority means the priority when a plurality of errors are detected at the same time, and even if an error having a higher priority than the error is detected after one error is detected. , Display contents are not changed. However, the priority of the error display in the slot machine 1 is not limited to this, and in the above example, it may be determined to switch to the display of the error with a higher priority detected later. Further, an example of display on the special display LED 612 is shown in the “SEG” column. In any case, in the slot machine 1, when a plurality of errors are detected, it is not possible to restart the game (play the next game) unless these errors are canceled.

In addition, when “video” is “◯” in the “notification method” column, for example, an image for notifying an error is displayed on the image display 500. However, the notification image by “video” is required to have display contents that are the same as the error display on the special display LED 612. When the “sound” is “◯”, for example, a notification sound is output from the speaker 512. When the “lamp” is “◯”, for example, the error lamp 604 is turned on or blinks. In the notification by sound output or lamp output, the notification mode may be changed according to the priority of the detected error. For example, when an error of high priority is detected, the error of low priority is detected. The notification mode may be emphasized in comparison.

Further, the “reset cancellation” column shows whether or not the error can be canceled by a reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. When the error that can be reset is released by resetting, the data area of “clear range 2” (see FIG. 84) of the data stored in the RAM 1114 is cleared.

When "immediate" is written in the "responsiveness" column, it means that the main board 409 can detect the error when the slot machine 1 is in operation. For example, when an illegal payout error is detected, the main board 409 immediately issues a command notifying the detection. That is, even if it is described as "immediately", it is not always necessary to display the error immediately when the error is detected. For example, after the result of the game is obtained (after the payout process is completed, or the payout process is performed). It is also possible to display an error before (start of). The fraudulent payout error is an urgent error that means that the gaming value has been fraudulently paid out.

[10-7-3. Error processing]
In the following, the processing when the error described in the previous chapter in the slot machine 1 occurs during a game (error occurrence processing) will be described. The specific details of the error occurrence process differ depending on what kind of requirement definition the slot machine 1 has regarding the error. Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 has a requirement definition (first requirement definition) relating to an error as described below, and the details of the error occurrence processing performed in such a case will be described.
(1) Grouping based on importance (for example, strong error and weak error) is not performed for a plurality of errors.
(2) Even if an error is detected during the game, the game continues to progress and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) Even if an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is continuously displayed.

86 and 87 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process according to the present embodiment. 86 and 87 together form one flow chart. In this flow chart, the overall processing procedure of one game is based on the processing procedure shown in FIG. 50, and further details the processing performed when an error occurs. Shows. It should be noted that FIGS. 86 and 87 show an example of a processing procedure when the game progresses in a non-power-off state (that is, a state in which the power is not turned off). On the other hand, FIG. 88, which will be described later, is a flowchart showing a processing procedure example of the power failure recovery processing in the present embodiment. In FIG. 88, the processing procedure is applied even when the power is turned off/on in the processing of FIGS. 86 and 87.

[10-7-3-1. Error processing (when power is off)]
With reference to FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, the processing procedure of one game including the processing at the time of error occurrence (at the time of non-power interruption) will be described. Note that the overall flow of processing overlaps with the series of processing shown in FIG. 50, so detailed description of the already described processing will be omitted. Further, unless otherwise specified, the processes of FIGS. 86 and 87 are executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110). Further, in order to make it easier to understand the situation in which each process is performed, the correspondence with the “state of the gaming machine” shown in FIG. 78 is also shown.

First, in FIG. 86, as described in the BET process of FIG. 50, after the specified number of game values (specifically, medals) have been inserted, the game is performed by the player pressing the start lever 210. It is started (step S801). The flow of such a game corresponds to "pressing the starting lever" from "inserting a medal" shown in FIG.

When the game is started by depressing the starting lever 210, an internal lottery process is performed (step S802), and a condition device whose operation is permitted based on the winning combination is acquired (step S803).

Next, in step S804, it is determined whether or not it is a section in which the special display LED 612 can display the indicating function. Here, the section in which the instruction function display is possible means a game (for example, during an ART game) in which the instruction function display by the instruction function can be executed. Note that, so far, although it has been mainly described that the instruction function display is performed during the ART game, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific game period other than the ART game (for example, relatively winning an ART is won. The instruction function display may be performed even in a chance zone (CZ, etc.) that is easy to perform. In such a case, an affirmative determination is obtained in step S804 even in games other than ART games.

If it is determined in step S804 that the display of the indicating function is possible (specifically, if it is determined that the main board 409 gives an instruction by the indicating function) (YES in step S804), in step S803. The instruction content by the instruction function is determined based on the acquired condition device (step S805). Next, the instruction content determined in step S805 is stored in the instruction function display area 1114i of the RAM 1114 (step S806).

Then, the rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S807). The timing of step S807 corresponds to "start reel rotation" shown in FIG. Then, by transmitting the instruction information command to the sub-board 510, the instruction content by the instruction function is notified (step S808). As a result, the sub-board 510 can cause the image display body 500 or the like to perform the navigation display at a predetermined display timing related to the navigation display based on the received instruction information command. In the slot machine 1, the instruction information command in step S808 may be transmitted at a timing before the start of rotation of the reel 301 (step S807).

After that, the instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 in step S806 is displayed on the special display LED 612 at a predetermined display timing related to the instruction display function (instruction function display) (step S809). Specific display examples of the indication function display are as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76. In addition, the predetermined display timing regarding the “navi display” and the “instruction function display” is as described above with reference to FIG. 78. Then, after the instruction function display in step S809, in step S810, acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S804 that it is not a section in which the instruction function display is possible (specifically, when it is not determined that the main board 409 issues an instruction by the instruction function) (NO in step S804). , The rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S811) without performing the processing relating to the instruction function as shown in steps S805, S806, S808, and S809, and the acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211a is started ( Step S812).

Steps S810 and S812 correspond to “reel stop button press acceptance possible” shown in FIG. 78. After the process of step S810 or step S812 is performed, the process proceeds to step S813.

In step S813, the player presses the first stop button (first stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 77 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S813 corresponds to "pressing first stop button" shown in FIG.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S813 and the pressing of the second stop button performed thereafter (step S814). If no error is detected in step S814 (NO in step S814), the process of step S815 is performed. If an error is detected in step S814 (YES in step S814), the process of step S819 is performed. In FIG. 87, when an error is detected in step S814, the process of step S819 is shown to be performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reels 301 that are rotating. The process of step S819 may be performed after the reel stop operation is performed on the remaining reels 301. This also applies to step S816. In the processing after such error detection, the priority (importance) may be set differently according to the type of error, and the processing may be selectively used based on the priority. For example, an error such as “HF (illegal payout error)” that is unlikely to occur in a normal game situation should be a high priority error. Then, when such an error with high priority is detected, it is better to perform the process of step S819 without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is rotating. preferable.

In step S815, the player presses the second stop button (second stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 77 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S815 corresponds to "pressing second stop button" shown in FIG.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the second stop button in step S815 and the pressing of the third stop button performed thereafter (step S816). If no error is detected in step S816 (NO in step S816), the process of step S817 is performed. When an error is detected in step S816 (YES in step S816), the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining spinning reel 301.

In step S817, the player presses the third stop button (third stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 77 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S817 corresponds to "pressing the third stop button" shown in FIG.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error is detected within a predetermined time period (for example, until all reels 301 are stopped) after the third stop button is pressed in step S817. Yes (step S818). After that, the process of step S819 is performed regardless of the presence or absence of error detection in step S818.

In step S819, the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is ended. However, if it is determined in step S804 that it is not a section in which the instruction function display is possible (NO in step S804), since the instruction function display in step S809 is not performed, special processing needs to be performed in step S819. There is no.

After that, in step S820, all reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it is possible to determine the winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line. The timing of step S820 corresponds to "stop all reels" shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 87, the processes of steps S819 and S820 are performed regardless of the presence or absence of error detection during the game up to that point, but the subsequent processes are determined as to whether or not an error has been detected. It depends on what. Specifically, if no error has been detected during the game so far, the processing from step S821 is performed, and if an error is detected during the game so far, the processing from step S825. Is done.

First, as a normal-time process in which no error is detected during the game until then, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the game value is paid out. In paying out the gaming value, when the stop of the winning combination is confirmed based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line, the gaming value corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. If it is determined in step S821 that there is no payout (NO in step S821), no error is detected and the game ends. When it is determined that there is a payout in step S821 (YES in step S821), the display of the number of payouts on the special display LED 612 is started (step S822), and at the same time, a payout process for gaming value (medals) is performed (step S823). .. After that, since no error has been detected, the game ends.

On the other hand, as the processing when an error is detected during the game until then, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming value is paid out (step S824).

The process of step S824 is the same as the process when no error is detected (step S821), and when it is determined that there is a payout (YES in step S824), step S822 (payout number display) and S823. The process of (payout process) is also the same.

However, if an error has been detected during the game up to that point, the processing of steps S816 and S827 is performed to cause the special display LED 612 to display an error. When the payout process is performed in step S823, after the payout process is completed, the payout amount display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S825), and then the processes of step S826 and subsequent steps are performed. If it is determined in step S824 that there is no payout, the processing in step S826 and subsequent steps is performed as it is.

In step S826, the special display LED 612 displays the type of error detected so far (error display). The display example of the error display is as shown in FIG. After that, an error canceling process is performed according to the error notified by the error display by the hall clerk, sales office, or the like (step S827), and the game ends.

As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected during the game, the special display LED 612 displays an instruction function display and a payout number display. It is possible to notify the player, the hall clerk, or the like of the type of the detected error by displaying the error without blocking.
Wear.

The gaming machine represented by the slot machine 1 described in the present embodiment can be represented as a technical idea in addition to the gaming machine described in claim 1.

[Technical idea 1]
Multiple pattern rows that can be variably displayed,
A role lottery means for performing a lottery to select one from a plurality of roles,
A stop operation means capable of stopping the variably displayed symbol row,
When the stop operation means is operated, stop control means for performing stop control of the symbol row based on the result of the winning combination lottery,
A gaming machine configured such that when a specific winning combination is selected in the winning combination lottery, the game result can be different depending on the operation mode of the stop operating device,
Advantageous game executing means for executing an advantageous game in which an advantageous game result can be shown to the player by being able to continuously generate an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means,
Setting lottery means for performing setting lottery related to setting of specific conditions,
An advantageous game execution condition setting means for setting the execution condition of the advantageous game based on the result of the setting lottery being a specific result,
As a lottery state in which the setting lottery is performed, a plurality of lottery states with different probabilities that the specific result is obtained are prepared, and a lottery state control means for controlling one of the plurality of lottery states,
Counting means for counting the parameters that can be updated as the game progresses based on the result of the setting lottery being a specific result,
Count ending means for ending the counting by the counting means on the basis that the parameter counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:

The gaming machine described in the above technical idea is equipped with an advantageous game (for example, ART game) capable of continuously generating an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means. In this type of gaming machine, for a plurality of winning combinations to be selected by the winning combination drawing means, the player is operated when the stop operation means is operated in an appropriate operation mode and when operated in an incorrect operation mode. Including an indicator having different amounts of game media awarded as a prize. The indicator corresponds to the “push order bell 1” to the “push order bell 6” in the present embodiment, and when operated in an appropriate operation mode, for example, 8 game media are awarded as a prize, which is incorrect. When operated in the operation mode, for example, 1 or 0 game media is awarded as a prize (when 0 game media is not awarded as a prize). The above-mentioned appropriate operation mode and incorrect operation mode correspond to cases where the pressing order is correct and incorrect, but are not limited thereto. For example, when the correct timing for stopping the stop operating means (reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is set as an appropriate operation mode, for example, eight game media are awarded as a prize and the stop operating means is stopped. When the answer is incorrect, for example, 1 or 0 game media may be awarded as a prize (in the case of 0, a prize game media is not awarded).

The advantageous game execution means executes an advantageous game capable of continuously generating an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means. The ability to continuously generate an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means means that an instruction to prompt the stop operation means to be operated in an appropriate operation mode can be continuously generated over a plurality of games. Means that.

The setting lottery means performs setting lottery related to the setting of the specific condition, and the advantageous game execution condition setting means sets the execution condition of the advantageous game based on the result of the setting lottery being a specific result. It is a thing. The setting lottery is a lottery that determines whether or not to set the execution condition of the advantageous game, and corresponds to the ART first win lottery of the present embodiment. Further, the specific result in the set lottery corresponds to the case where the ART first win lottery of the present embodiment is won. Furthermore, the execution condition of the advantageous game is a condition for allowing execution of the advantageous game, and corresponds to the number of ceiling games in the present embodiment. That is, when the ART first win lottery is won, the ceiling game number (32 games in this embodiment) is set, and when the set ceiling game number is executed, the ART game is permitted to be executed.

The advantageous game is a game in which the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means can be continuously generated. The ability to continuously generate an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means means that an instruction to prompt the stop operation means to be operated in an appropriate operation mode can be continuously generated over a plurality of games. Means that. Note that the advantageous game described above corresponds to the ART game described in the present embodiment, but is not limited to this and may be a so-called AT game.

As a lottery state in which the above-mentioned set lottery is performed, a plurality of lottery states with different probabilities of obtaining a specific result are prepared. In the present embodiment, as the lottery state when the advantageous game is being executed, an ART medium/low probability state, an ART medium/high probability state, a specialized zone, and a specialized zone preparing are prepared. Further, as a lottery state when the advantageous game is not being executed, a hell state, a non-ART medium low probability state, and a non-ART medium high probability state are prepared. In addition to this, a non-lottery state in which the advantageous game execution lottery itself is not performed is also prepared.

Then, based on the result of the setting lottery being a specific result, the counting means executes the counting of the parameters that can be updated as the game progresses. The parameter referred to here is the number of games executed in the present embodiment, but is not limited to this. For example, the difference number (the number of game media provided as a prize and the number of game media provided for execution of the game) And the number of times the above-mentioned indicator is selected in the internal lottery.

When the parameters counted by the counting means satisfy a predetermined condition, the counting of the number of games is ended. In the present embodiment, when the parameter (the number of games) counted in the non-ART lottery state or the ART lottery state reaches the threshold value, the counting of the parameter is completed and the state shifts to the no-lottery state, and then 0 cards When the bell zero appears and the RT state is changed to RT1, the state is changed to the hell state. It should be noted that when the counting of the parameters is completed, the state may be shifted to the hell state instead of being shifted to the no-lottery state.

The above parameters are updated with the progress of the game, but the updating method may be a method of adding and updating with the progress of the game, or subtracting and updating from the specified value with the progress of the game. It may be a technique. For example, when the above-mentioned parameter is “the number of games executed”, 1 is added when one game is executed by the addition update method, and 1 game is executed by the subtraction update method. 1 is subtracted. In the present embodiment, when one game is executed, the number of executed games is incremented by 1. When the number of executed games reaches the threshold value, the counting of the number of games is finished. On the other hand, in the case of the method of subtraction update, when one game is executed, 1 is subtracted from the above threshold value, and when it becomes 0, counting of the number of games ends.

In the present embodiment, there are a period in which the number of games is counted (a period in which the game number management flag is set to ON) and a period in which the number of games is not counted (a period in which the game number management flag is set to OFF). Compared with each other, the period during which the number of games is counted is higher. Then, in the hell state where the number of games is not counted, the winning probability in the set lottery means (ART first win lottery) is low, but at the time of transition to another lottery state (non-ART lottery state, ART lottery state) The advantageous game can be executed with a higher probability (30% in the present embodiment) than in other lottery states (at least non-ART medium low probability state). Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the interest while suppressing the gambling property.

The above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but is not limited to this. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine other than the slot machine, such as a pachinko machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

1 Slot Machine 10 Gap 21 Transparent Plate 50 Model Unit 90 Front Opening/Closing Member 100 Outer Main Body 100a Rotating Shaft 101 Bottom Plate 102 Side Plate 102a Convex Surface 102b Guard Part 103 Top Plate 104a Heat Dissipation Port 104b Code Exit 105 Partition Plate 106 Projection 107 Piece 108 Mounting piece 109 Opening 110 Medal discharging device 110a Device main body 110b Hopper 110c Discharging port 110d Overflow gutter 110e Dispensing sensor 111 Game auxiliary storage box 111a Medal full sensor 112 Power supply 112a Device case 112b Top plate 112c Rear plate 112d Front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Vent hole 112h Leg 112i Vent space 112j Step 112k Mounting piece 112m Projection 112m-1 Projection 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Board 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay Member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Main body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector substrate 123 Connector substrate 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 The opening 128 Supporting cylinder 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay Terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent 200 Door type front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal saucer 202 Operation part 203 Medal insertion slot 205 1 insertion button 206 MAX insertion button 207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b Insertion sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage Release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Middle reel stop button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal gutter 213 Return gutter 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Frame frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitting body 217a-1 Light source 217a-2 Light guide plate 217b Reflecting member 218 Fixing member 219 Recessed groove 300 Pattern variation display device 301a Left reel (first reel)
301b Middle reel (second reel)
301c Right reel (3rd reel)
302 device case 303 drive means 304 bottom plate 305 top plate part 305 top plate part 306 right side plate 307 left side plate 308 rear plate 309 upper swash plate 310 lower swash plate 311 handle 312 reel substrate 313 cable 315 retaining portion 316 grips 321a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Symbol display window 402 Reinforcement bar 402a Guide portion 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main substrate 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Recessed step portion 413 Tapered portion 414 Wheel 415 Collar 416 Hooking portion 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 420 Hinge metal fitting 420a Fixing member 420b times Moving member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Overlap area 420h Overlap area 420h Overlap area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle port 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receptacle 430 Through hole 431 Attachment piece 432 Button type panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Claw piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 engagement Stop hole 443 Skylight 444 Reinforcing band 449 Main board 500 Image display 500s Broken line area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Lighting device 503 Substrate 505 Light transmissive lid plate 506 Tube frame 507 Light transmissive cover 508 Receiving part 509 Engaging part 510 Sub-board 512 Speaker 600 Upper bar 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Medal IN lamp 612 (612a, 612b, 612c) Special display LED
613 (613a, 613b) Storage number display LED
614 BET lamp 623a Right downward line 623b Right upward line 700 Connection tool 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Preventing piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hooking wall 703 Stop shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Knob 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 I/O interface 1130 I/O interface 1200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

A plurality of variably displayable symbol rows and a stop operation means capable of stopping the variably displayed symbol rows,
A gaming machine, in which a game result appears when the stop operating means is operated ,
And advantageously game execution selecting means for performing run lottery before Symbol stop operation means of the operation mode instruction of capable of continuously generated Advantageously game,
Advantageous game executing means capable of executing the advantageous game based on a result of the execution lottery of the advantageous game being a specific result,
As a lottery state in which the execution lottery of the advantageous game is performed , a lottery state control means for controlling one of a plurality of lottery states in which the probability of obtaining the specific result is different,
A count that executes a count of parameters that can be updated as the game progresses based on the transition from the low probability state in which the probability of obtaining the specific result is the lowest among the plurality of lottery states to another lottery state. Means and
When the parameter reaches a predetermined value during the execution of the advantageous game, the advantageous game forced ending means for forcibly ending the advantageous game even if the advantageous game is in the middle,
When the execution of the counting of the parameter is started and the parameter, which is a condition for forcibly ending the advantageous game even if the advantageous game is in the middle, reaches the predetermined value, the specific result is obtained. Transition to the lowest probability state with the lowest probability
The gaming machine which is characterized a call.